2019 Aston Martin DB11 Owner's Manual PDF

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 1 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Welcome

Welcome to your new Aston Martin DB11.

This Owner’s Handbook has been designed to explain the

vehicle’s operation and to make the control of its systems easy to

understand and operate. All new owners are recommended to

read the Owner’s Handbook prior to driving. This Owner’s

Handbook forms part of the essential vehicle equipment for

homologation purposes and must stay with the vehicle at all

times.

Warnings, Cautions and Notes

The following Warnings, Cautions and Notes are used within this

Owner’s Guide to call your attention to specific types of

information.

Warning: Provided to show procedures which must be

followed precisely to help avoid the risk of personal injury.

Caution: Provided to show procedures which must be

followed precisely to reduce the possibility of damage to your

vehicle.

Provided to show procedures which will help to avoid

difficulties in the operation of your vehicle.

Airbag Warning Labels

Warning: Extreme Hazard: NEVER use a rearward facing

child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in

front of it. DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the Child can

occur.

Warning labels are located on both driver and passenger sun

visors and on the passenger end of the instrument panel.

[A] : US Variant

[B] : Canada Variant

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 2 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Component Location

All directions for locating components are described as viewed

from the driver’s seat, i.e. the fuel filler flap shown on this

diagram will be described as ‘located at the rear right side of the

vehicle’.

Vehicle Battery Disposal

It is the responsibility of the vehicle owner when disposing of

automotive batteries to do it in an environmentally correct

manner.

The incorrect disposal of a vehicle (lead-acid) battery can be

extremely hazardous to health and the environment. Most

batteries contain materials that, when disposed of incorrectly,

may leak into the environment. This can contribute to soil and

water pollution and endanger wildlife.

Do not dispose of a battery in fire or water.

Follow your local authorized standards for disposal. Call your

local authorized recycling centre to find out more about recycling

automotive batteries.

Do not dispose of your vehicle battery in the household waste.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 3 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Vehicle Identification

The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is shown in the left side

bottom corner of the windscreen.

The VIN plate can also be found in the passenger side door shut

panel and laser etched onto the right side footwell.

To view the VIN etched into the floor panel, lift the carpet up

from the front, and then lift the sound deadening material.

Event Data Recorder (EDR)

This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR).

The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near

crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a

road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a

vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data

related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period

of time, typically 30 seconds or less.

The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:

• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;

• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were

buckled/fastened;

• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelera

tor

and/or brake pedal; and,

• How fast the vehicle was traveling.

These data can help provide a better understanding of the

circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.

EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial

crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under

normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name,

gender, age, and crash location) are recorded.

However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine

the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data

routinely acquired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required,

and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.

In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law

enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the

information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 4 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Reporting Safety Defects

North America

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a

crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately

inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration

(NHTSA) in addition to notifying Aston Martin Lagonda of North

America Inc., 9920 Irvine Center Drive, Irvine, CA 92618, USA.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an

investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group

of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign.

However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual

problems between you, your Dealer, or Aston Martin Lagonda

(North America) Inc.

To contact NHTSA:

Call the Vehicle Safety hot-line toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:

1-800-424-9153)

Go to www.safercar.gov

Write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW.,

Washington, DC 20590.

You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety

from www.safercar.gov.

Canada

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a

crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately

inform Transport Canada in addition to notifying your Aston

Martin Dealer.

To contact Transport Canada, call their toll-free number: 1-800-

333-0510

Health

CALIFORNIA Proposition 65

Warning: Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and

certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals

known to the State of California to cause cancer, and birth

defects or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain

fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of

component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the

State of California to cause cancer, and birth defects or other

reproductive harm.

Warning: Battery posts, terminals and related accessories

contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after

handling.

Perchlorate Material

Certain components of this vehicle such as air bag modules, seat

belt pre-tensioners and roll over protection devices may contain

Perchlorate Material. Special handling may apply for service or

vehicle end of life disposal. Go to www.dtsc.ca.gov/

hazardouswaste/perchlorate for more information.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 5 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Driving Safety

• Always wear your seat belt.

• Never drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs.

• Always obey all speed and traffic laws and regulations. Ne

ver

drive faster than the posted speed limit or than conditions

allow.

• Be particularly careful driving on slippery or wet surfaces.

• This vehicle is a high performance vehicle and has handling

characteristics you may not be accustomed to. Familiarise

yourself with the vehicle and always drive prudently, being

aware of your own limitations and the limitations of the

vehicle. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operat

the vehicle correctly can result in accident and injury.

• Follow the maintenance schedule approved in this guide.

• Never allow the vehicle to be driven by inexperienced

drivers.

Make sure that you are wearing appropriate footwear to

efficiently operate the control pedals. Make sure that pedal

movement is not restricted by floor mats or other objects trapped

beneath pedals.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 6 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Aston Martin Owners' Club (AMOC)

An invitation to join the Aston Martin Owners' Club

The sporting spirit of the 1930s exists today in one of the world’s

most exclusive car clubs. Enthusiasts in nearly 60 countries are

united by an interest in iconic cars with an enviable pedigree.

Enjoy the company of like-minded owners in a wide range of

activities: social evenings, weekends away or motoring tours.

Something more competitive? AMOC Concours are a benchmark

for connoisseurs of fine motorcars. A need for speed? We

organize track days, sprints and hill climbs as well as circuit racing

in venues such as Silverstone, Goodwood and Lime Rock in the

USA.

Aston Martin Owners' Club

Drayton St. Leonard

Wallingford

Oxfordshire

England

OX10 7BG

Telephone:

+44 (0) 1865 400 400

Facsimile:

+44 (0) 1865 400 200

E-Mail:

[email protected]

Website:

www.amoc.org

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 2 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Aston Martin Heritage Trust

The Aston Martin Heritage Trust is an educational charity

dedicated to the preservation, promotion and enhancement of

over 100 years of history of Aston Martin. Its world class

collection comprising the automotive museum, substantial

archive and collection of historical artefacts is housed in the

magnificently restored Grade II* listed barn in Oxfordshire which

it shares with the Owners' Club. As a member of the Owners’

Club you become a member and supporter of the Trust, so please

log on to our web site for more information, or better still pay us

a visit and see the collection for yourself.

Aston Martin Heritage Trust

Drayton St. Leonard

Wallingford

Oxfordshire

England

OX10 7BG

Telephone:

+44 (0) 1865 400 414

Facsimile:

+44 (0) 1865 400 200

E-Mail:

secretary@amht.org.uk

Website:

www.amht.org.uk

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 3 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Quick Start.......................................................................1

Vehicle Security ...............................................................2

Before Driving..................................................................3

Controls...........................................................................4

Driving.............................................................................5

Climate Control................................................................6

Hands-Free Phone ...........................................................7

Media Systems.................................................................8

Satellite Navigation ..........................................................9

Vehicle Settings..............................................................10

Convertible Roof............................................................11

Maintenance and Technical Data...................................12

Service............................................................................ A

Aston Martin Warranty.....................................................B

Aston Martin Assistance................................................... C

Alphabetical Index ..........................................................D

Every effort has been made to make sure that the information

provided in this Owner’s Handbook is accurate and up-to-date.

However neither the manufacturer or the Dealer, by whom this

Owner’s Handbook is supplied, will in any circumstances be

held responsible for any inaccuracy or the consequences

Software instructions in this handbook are correct at time of print.

However, these may be subject to change due to ongoing

software updates during the vehicle’s lifetime. Contact your

Aston Martin Dealer for further information

Reserved. This publication is provided with your vehicle for your

personal, private and non-commercial use. No part of this

publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system or

transmitted, in any form, electronic, mechanical, photocopying,

recording or other means without prior written permission from

Aston Martin Lagonda Limited.

No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a

retrieval system or transmitted, in any form, electronic,

mechanical, photocopying, recording or other means without

prior written permission from Aston Martin Lagonda Limited.

The manufacturer reserves the right to vary specifications

without notice in accordance with its policy of continual product

improvement.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 4 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Produced by the Technical Publications Department

Aston Martin Lagonda Limited

Banbury Road

Gaydon

Warwick

CV35 0DB

England

Telephone:

+44 (0)1926 644300

Issue 2: March 2018

Part Number: KY53-19A321-HA

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 5 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 1 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Quick Start

Vehicle Key...................................................................1.2

Driving Position.............................................................1.3

Vehicle Controls............................................................1.6

Infotainment ...............................................................1.11

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 1 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

1.2 Quick Start

Vehicle Key

What Do The Buttons On The Key Do?

(Refer to ’Vehicle Key’, page 2.2)

[1] LOCK: Press to lock the vehicle and arm the security

system.

[2] UNLOCK: Press to unlock either the driver's door or

the vehicle.

[3] DECK LID OPEN: Press and hold to release the deck

lid catch.

Global Close

Press and hold to unlock all vehicle doors and open all

windows.

Press and hold to lock all doors and close all windows.

Volante: Global close will also open or close the convertible roof.

Keyless Entry

To unlock the vehicle with Keyless-Go active, fully push the front

edge of the door handle. If the system recognizes a valid key

signal, the door will unlock and open.

To lock the vehicle, close all the vehicle doors and press the rear

edge of the door handle to activate the lock switch.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 2 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Quick Start 1.3

Driving Position

How Do I Adjust The Seat?

(Refer to ’Seat Adjustment’, page 3.2)

[1] BOLSTER/LUMBAR ADJUSTMENT SELECTOR SWITCH

(OPTIONAL): Press the switch up to select lumbar adjustment.

Press down to select bolster adjustment.

[2] BOLSTER/LUMBAR ADJUSTMENT: Use the directional pad

to adjust the position of the lumbar or bolster support.

[3] SEAT POSITION ADJUST: Seat forward/backward and height

adjust. Raise front to tilt base of seat.

[4] SEAT BACKREST ADJUST: Seat back angle adjust.

[5] MEMORY SEAT POSITIONS: Use to select or store memory

positions for the seat, steering column and wing mirror positions .

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 3 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

1.4 Quick Start

How Do I Get To The Back Seats?

Pull the release strap (A) to release the seat back. Pull and hold to

move the seat back forward.

What Do The Door Switches Do?

[A] DOOR MIRROR SELECTOR: Press to select left or right door

mirror (Refer to ’Exterior Mirrors’, page 3.7).

[B] DOOR MIRROR ADJUSTMENT: Use the direction pad to

adjust the mirror position.

[C] WINDOW SWITCH: Press or pull to operate the driver or

passenger windows (Refer to ’Electric Windows’, page 3.5).

[D] DECK LID: Press and hold to release the deck lid catch (Refer

to ’Deck Lid’, page 2.7).

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 4 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Quick Start 1.5

How Do I Adjust The Steering Column?

(Refer to ’Steering Column’, page 3.8)

The reach and tilt angle of the steering column are adjusted by

using the adjustment lever. Push the lever down or up to adjust

the steering column angle. Pull the lever towards you to bring the

steering wheel closer and away to move the steering wheel back.

How Do I Use The Memory Positions?

(Refer to ’How Do I Use The Memory Positions?’, page 1.5)

Setting a Position

Adjust the seat, steering column and the door rear view mirrors

to the desired position. Push the memory button (M), then press

the required memory channel (1, 2 or 3) to save the positions. A

chime is heard and a message will show in the message centre to

confirm. By repeating these steps and pressing an unused button,

a second and third driving position can be saved in the memory.

Recalling a Memory Position

Once in the seat press and hold button 1, 2 or 3 (depending on

which saved channel is required) until all movement is stopped.

The seat will move to the saved position.

Seat and steering wheel movement will be interrupted if the

memory channel button is released. Exterior mirror movement

will continue. Press and hold the memory channel button to

complete seat and steering wheel movement.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 5 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

1.6 Quick Start

Vehicle Controls

What Do The Centre Stack Switches Do?

(Refer to ’Centre Stack Controls’, page 4.5)

[1] ENGINE START/STOP:

Press to start or stop the engine (Refer to ’How To Start The

Engine’, page 5.4).

[2] TRANSMISSION CONTROL BUTTONS:

Press to select a transmission mode (Refer to ’PRND Buttons’,

page 5.6).

[3] HEATING AND COOLING CONTROLS:

Operates the climate controls (Refer to ’Centre Stack Climate

Controls’, page 6.2).

[4] INFOTAINMENT CONTROLS:

Operate the various infotainment controls.

(Refer to ’Multimedia Controls’, page 8.4)

(Refer to ’Hands-Free Controls’, page 7.2)

(Refer to ’Navigation Controls’, page 9.2)

[5] STOP/START FUNCTION:

Turn the Stop/Start function on and off (Refer to ’Stop/Start’, page

5.27).

[6] MASTER LOCK SWITCHES:

Lock or unlock the vehicle (Refer to ’Unlocking From Inside the

Vehicle’, page 2.6).

[7] HAZARD WARNING SWITCH:

Press to set the hazard warning lamps to ON or OFF (Refer to

’Hazard lamps’, page 4.19).

[8] PARK ASSIST FUNCTIONS:

Operate PDC sensors or operate 360° camera system (Refer to

’Park Assist Systems’, page 5.28).

[9] PASSENGER AIRBAG STATUS:

Indicator to show if the passenger airbag is active or not

(Refer to ’Occupant Classification System’, page 3.20).

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 6 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Quick Start 1.7

What Does The Control Dial Do?

Control Dial shown with optional Touch Pad

[1] CONTROL DIAL:

Use to navigate through menus in the infotainment system. Press

down to confirm a selection (referred to as ENTER throughout this

handbook).

[2] TOUCH PAD (OPTIONAL):

Touch sensitive pad which can be used to navigate menus in the

infotainment system. Press down to confirm a selection. The

touch pad can also be used for handwriting recognition (Refer to

’Touch Pad’, page 4.7).

[3] FAVOURITE:

Press to view items on your favourites list. Press and hold

to add the current menu item to the favourite list.

[4] QUICK ACCESS MENU (TOUCH PAD ONLY):

Press to access the quick access menu.

[5] BACK:

Press to go back a level in the menu.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 7 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

1.8 Quick Start

What Are The Steering Wheel Controls?

Switches

[1] ADAPTIVE DAMPING:

Press to cycle adaptive damping modes (Refer to ’Adaptive

Damping’, page 5.15).

[2] START VOICE CONTROL:

Press to start voice control (Refer to ’Voice Control’, page

4.16).

[3] MENU HOME:

Press to open the instrument cluster menu (Refer to

’Instrument Cluster Menu’, page 4.13).

[4] DRIVE MODE:

Press to cycle between drive modes (Refer to ’Drive

Modes’, page 5.10).

[5] MENU SCROLL:

Roll the menu scroll wheel up or down to navigate the instrument

cluster menu. Press the scroll wheel button to select an item in

the menu (referred to in this handbook as OK).

[6] CALL:

Press to answer an incoming call (Refer to ’Calls’, page

7.5).

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 8 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Quick Start 1.9

[7] MENU BACK:

Press to take the instrument cluster menu back one level.

[8] HORN:

Push to sound the vehicle horn.

[9] END VOICE CONTROL:

End voice control.

[10] END CALL:

Press to end a call or reject an incoming call.

[11] VOLUME DIAL:

Roll the volume scroll wheel up or down to increase or decrease

volume for the audio system, or volume during a phone call.

Press the scroll wheel button to set sound to ON or OFF.

Transmission Paddles

Pull back on either paddle to enter Touchtronic mode (Refer to

’Touchtronic Controls’, page 5.7).

[1] : Downshift Paddle

[2] : Upshift Paddle

Neutral is selected by pulling back both paddles together and

releasing or by pressing (N) Neutral on the centre stack.

P (Park) and R (Reverse) are selected by using the centre stack

mounted PRND buttons.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 9 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

1.10 Quick Start

What Do The Stalks Control?

Indicators and Headlamp Beam

Main Beam

Push the stalk for main beam headlamps. Pull the stalk back to

the initial position to return to dipped beam headlamps.

Flash Headlamps

Pull the stalk to flash the main beam headlamps.

Direction Indicators

Press up to briefly indicate a right turn and down for a left turn.

Press until the switch latches to hold the selected indicator on.

Wiper Controls

Rotate the wipe speed selector (A) to select a wipe speed.

[1] : Windscreen wipers OFF

[2] : Intermittent wipe (low rain sensor sensitivity)

[3] : Intermittent wipe (high rain sensor sensitivity)

[4] : Continuous wipe (slow)

[5] : Continuous wipe (fast)

[6] : Single wipe. Press and hold to operate the front windscreen

washers.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 10 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Quick Start 1.11

How Do I Turn On The Exterior Lamps?

[1] : Left side park lamp

[2] : Right side park lamp

[3] : Side lamps (including number plate lamps)

[4] : Dipped beam headlamps

[5] : Automatic headlamp mode

[6] : Rear foglamp

Infotainment

How Do I Activate The Vehicle Bluetooth?

Bluetooth® must be activate on both the vehicle and the

mobile device to be used.

Before a Bluetooth®

device can be used with the vehicle

Bluetooth®, the vehicle's Bluetooth® system must be set to ON.

To set the vehicle Bluetooth® system ON:

• Navigate to Vehicle on the main menu.

•Select System Settings.

•Select Activate Bluetooth and set to ON.

The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks

owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any use of such marks by Aston

Martin is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of

their respective owners.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 11 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

1.12 Quick Start

How Do I Pair A Bluetooth Device

(Refer to ’Device Management’, page 7.2)

To add a new device, select Tel from the main menu and

navigate to Connect Device and select Search for Phones or

Search via Telephone.

Search for Phones

The mobile device must be set to discoverable mode. Refer to

the mobile device manufacturers instructions.

Select Search for Phones to begin a search for discoverable

phones. Select the required phone and press ENTER. Follow the

instructions shown on the phone and the infotainment display to

pair the phone.

Search via Telephone

Select Search via Telephone to set the infotainment system to

'listen' for a mobile phone connection. Follow the mobile phone

manufacturer's instructions to search and connect to a new

Bluetooth® device. The phone will search for discoverable

Bluetooth® devices in its range.

Select Aston Martin DB11 from the device list.

If Aston Martin DB11 does not show, check that Bluetooth is

active in the infotainment system and search again

Follow the instructions shown on the phone and the infotainment

display to pair the phone.

Completing Device Pairing

Once the mobile phone is paired it is ready for use with the

vehicle hands-free system. The vehicle will also request access to

call history, contact list and messages.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 12 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Quick Start 1.13

How Do I Pair A Bluetooth Audio Device

(Refer to ’Bluetooth Connection’, page 8.16)

Bluetooth® audio must be paired to the vehicle

independently from the Bluetooth® hands free connection.

To select a Bluetooth® audio device:

1. Make sure Bluetooth® is activated on your device and in

discoverable mode

2. Select Bluetooth Audio as a media source.

3. In the Options menu, select Bluetooth Audio Devices.

4. Select a Bluetooth® device from the list of devices.

For new devices:

5. Select the device from the list to begin pairing.

6. A code will be shown on the infotainment display. If this

code matches the code shown on the Bluetooth® device

select Yes to complete pairing.

Select No to cancel pairing the Bluetooth® device.

How Do I Operate The Media System?

Refer to device manufacturers instructions.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 13 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

1.14 Quick Start

[1] DISC SLOT:

Slot to insert a CD or DVD disc.

[2] EJECT:

Press to eject disc.

[3] MEDIA:

Opens the Media screen (Refer to ’Media’, page 8.9).

Opens the media source list if media screen is already open.

[4] VOLUME CONTROLS:

Press to increase and to decrease volume. Sliding a

finger along the volume bar will also increase or decrease

volume.

Volume can also be controlled by the left scroll wheel on the

steering wheel.

[5] RADIO:

Open the Radio screen (Refer to ’Radio’, page 8.5).

Opens the radio source list if media screen is already open.

[6] POWER:

Press to turn the infotainment system ON or OFF.

How Do I Change The Media Source?

Press or select Media from the main menu with to show the

available media sources. Rotate the CONTROL DIAL and press

ENTER to select a media source.

Select from the following media sources:

•Disc

•Memory Card

•Media Register

•USB 1

•USB 2

•Bluetooth Audio

Alternatively, select a media source from Devices(Refer to

’Devices’, page 8.15).

For formats that can be used (Refer to ’Media File Systems and

Formats’, page 8.11).

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 14 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Quick Start 1.15

What Can I Listen To?

Radio

(Refer to ’Radio’, page 8.5)

Press on the centre stack or select Radio from the main

menu.

•

•FM Radio

• SiriusXM Radio

•AM Radio

• Radio Presets

Rotate the CONTROL DIAL to select a radio source and press

ENTER

Selecting a station from the display screen

The display screen shows available stations that can be played.

Rotate the CONTROL DIAL with the centre display highlighted to

select a radio station.

Selecting a station from the current stations list

Press ENTER with the centre display highlighted to open the

current stations list.

Rotate the CONTROL DIAL to select a radio station and press

ENTER.

Portable Media Audio

Press on the centre stack or select Media from the main

menu to open the media Now Playing screen.

The Now Playing screen shows track information such as album

art, artist and album name on the left side of the screen along

with track play time and track number. Media source device and

track name are shown on the right side of the screen.

MW frequencies only.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 15 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

1.16 Quick Start

What Can I Watch?

Portable Media Video

Video files from portable media can also be supported with the

infotainment system. In the Now Playing screen, highlight the

view window area and press ENTER.

DVD Video Media

The Now Playing screen initially shows video in full screen mode.

Press ENTER to bring up the basic DVD information bar which

shows media source, track/title number, scene number and play

time.

Press ENTER on Menu to show the upper and lower information

bars. Media playback will continue.

To return to full screen display, push up or down on the

CONTROL DIAL to highlight the display area and press ENTER on

the full screen symbol .

How Do I Set A Navigation Destination?

(Refer to ’Destination’, page 9.9)

Press or Select Nav to open the Navigation screen.

Select Destination from the lower information bar and select

Address Entry.

Enter a destination in the Address Entry screen and select Start to

begin navigation.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 16 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Vehicle Security

Vehicle Key...................................................................2.2

Unlocking and Opening ................................................2.5

Emergency Access and Start...........................................2.9

Anti-Theft Systems.......................................................2.11

Garage Door Opener ..................................................2.13

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 1 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

2.2 Vehicle Security

Vehicle Key

The vehicle is supplied with three vehicle keys; Two primary keys

and an emergency key.

Keep the second primary key in a safe place. Do not leave a

vehicle key in the vehicle when unattended.

Warning: The engine can be started by any person in the

vehicle if the brake pedal is pressed down and the start

button is pressed. Care should be taken that the vehicle key

is not left in the vehicle with only occupants such as young

children or pets inside.

If a vehicle key is lost, contact your Aston Martin Dealer.

If the vehicle key is not in the vehicle, the message 'Key Not

Found' will be displayed in the instrument cluster when trying to

start the vehicle. This message will also be displayed if the vehicle

key battery does not have enough charge to be detected by the

keyless start system.

FCC Warning: Changes not expressly approved by the

party responsible for compliance could void the user’s

authority to operate the equipment.

FCC - Radio Frequency Devices

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is

subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not

cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any

interference received, including interference that may cause

undesired operation.

Vehicle Key Functions

[1] LOCK: Press and release to lock the vehicle and arm

the security system.

[2] UNLOCK: Press and release to unlock either the

driver's door or the vehicle (Refer to ’One Step Unlocking’,

page 2.3).

[3] DECK LID OPEN: Press and hold to release the deck

lid catch.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 2 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Vehicle Security 2.3

Global Close

You must be within 2m of the vehicle to operate Global

Close.

Press and hold to unlock all vehicle doors and open all

windows.

Press and hold to lock all doors and close all windows.

Volante Roof

When the Global Close function is used, the convertible roof will

also open or close with the windows respectively.

One Step Unlocking

The vehicle key can be set to either unlock only the drivers door

on a single press of or all vehicle doors.

To cycle between single door unlock and full unlock, press and

hold and at the same time for 6 seconds.

If the vehicle is set to only open the driver's door, a second

press of will open all vehicle doors.

Lock operation of the fuel filler flap is not affected.

One step Unlocking can only be set using the vehicle key.

Vehicle Key Battery

Battery Power Conservation

Keyless Go can be deactivated to conserve battery power in the

vehicle key.

To deactivate Keyless Go, double tap .

To activate Keyless Go, press any button on the vehicle key or

insert the vehicle key into the emergency ignition switch.

Battery Replacement

To replace the vehicle key's battery:

1. Lift the battery cover (A).

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 3 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

2.4 Vehicle Security

2. Push down on the battery to tilt the battery (B) and allow

access.

3. Remove the battery and install the new battery with the (+)

sign facing up.

4. Replace the battery cover.

Keyless Start Failure

If the vehicle does not start because the charge vehicle key

battery is too low use the emergency start procedure (Refer to

’Emergency Engine Start’, page 2.10).

Keyless Go Zones

The Keyless Go function for vehicle locking and ignition will

operate when a vehicle key is in one of the below reception

zones:

The vehicle key is only needed in one of the reception zones

for Keyless Go. For example, the vehicle key can be in the rear

reception zone and the passenger side door can be unlocked.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 4 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Vehicle Security 2.5

Unlocking and Opening

Unlocking From Outside the Vehicle

Using The Vehicle Key

Stand within 5 m of the vehicle, point the vehicle key towards the

vehicle and press . To show that the security system has

been disarmed, the direction indicators will flash twice. An

audible confirmation can also be set in the vehicle settings (Refer

to ’Vehicle Settings’, page 10.2). All vehicle doors will unlock.

Push at point (A) and grab the emerging door release. Pull the

door release to open the door.

The driver's door can be set to unlock with the first press of

the button and the rest of the vehicle with a second press (Refer

to ’One Step Unlocking’, page 2.3).

For ease of use at night white LEDs are incorporated into the

door handles. An LED will come on in the door handles when the

vehicle is unlocked. The door LEDs will go off after 40 seconds or

if the vehicle is locked again.

Using Keyless Entry

To unlock the vehicle with Keyless-Go active, fully push at point

(A) and grab the emerging door release. The front edge of the

door handle will press a switch and search for the vehicle key

signal. If the system recognizes a valid key signal, the door will

unlock and open.

Keyless Entry can be set to only unlock the driver's door and

fuel filler cap.

If a door is opened while driving a warning sound will be heard

until the door is closed.

The interior lamps are automatically set to off when the engine is

started.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 5 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

2.6 Vehicle Security

Locking From Outside the Vehicle

Using The Vehicle Key

Close all the vehicle doors. Stand within 5m of the vehicle, point

the vehicle key towards the vehicle and press . The direction

indicators will flash twice and all vehicle doors will lock.

If is pressed with the driver's door open, the vehicle will

not lock until that door has been closed.

Using Keyless Entry

Close all the vehicle doors. Press the rear edge of the door handle

to activate the lock switch.

Unlocking From Inside the Vehicle

Both doors can be locked and unlocked by using the master

unlock (1) and lock (2) switches located on the centre

stack.

If the vehicle is locked using the master lock switch, one pull of a

door handle will centrally unlock the doors and will open that

door.

If the vehicle is not locked using the vehicle key, the master lock

switch will operate seven minutes after the ignition control has

been turned off.

The master lock switch will not operate if the vehicle has been

locked from the outside.

In the event of a vehicle accident the doors will automatically

unlock.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 6 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Vehicle Security 2.7

Easy Entry/Exit

Warning: The Easy Entry/Exit function could cause an

occupant to become trapped and/or cause injury. Keep

clear of the steering wheel when the Easy Entry/Exit

function is used.

Easy Entry/Exit movement can be cancelled by moving the

adjustment lever for the steering column or by selecting a

memory position.

To aid entry and exit from the vehicle, the steering wheel can be

set to move when the driver's door is opened.

Easy Entry/Exit can be set in the vehicle settings menu (Refer to

’Vehicle Settings’, page 10.2).

Automatic Locking

If the vehicle is unlocked but a door is not opened within 40

seconds, the vehicle will automatically lock and arm again.

Deck Lid

Volante Only

Decklid operation will be disabled when the tonneau cover for

the convertible roof is open. Fully open or close the convertible

roof to be able to access the luggage compartment.

Opening The Deck Lid Outside the Vehicle

Press and hold (A) on the vehicle key to enable the release

catch and lift the deck lid.

If the vehicle is locked when is pressed, the doors will

remain locked and the security system will still be armed.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 7 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

2.8 Vehicle Security

Opening the Deck Lid Inside the Vehicle

Press and hold the deck lid release button (B). The deck lid catch

will release. Lift the lid.

Hands-Free Access

Warning: Make sure there is sufficient clearance under

the rear of the vehicle and that you stand on firm ground. It

is possible you could lose your balance on some surfaces,

such as on ice.

Warning: The vehicle exhaust system can become very

hot. To prevent injury make sure you only move your foot in

the detection range of the sensors.

Caution: Do not touch the bumper when you move your

foot to operate the system. If you do, you can cause damage

the bumper.

The hands-free access system may not function correctly if

there is a build-up of dirt, road salt or snow around the sensors.

It is possible the deck lid could be released unintentionally,

such as when the rear bumper is being cleaned, or in an

automatic car wash. Do not carry the vehicle key with you in such

situations. This will prevent unintentional opening or closing of

the deck lid.

Hands-free access can be used to release the catch for the deck

lid. To operate, quickly move your foot under the rear bumper.

For the hands-free access system to operate:

• The vehicle key must be in the rear Keyless Go detection area

of the vehicle (Refer to ’Keyless Go Zones’, page 2.4).

• The engine must not be running.

If the deck lid does not release after several attempts, wait at

least ten seconds before you try again.

If you hold your foot under the bumper for too long, the deck lid

will not release.

Closing the Deck Lid

Push the deck lid down and make sure that the catch engages.

Once the catch engages, it automatically closes. If the deck lid is

slammed shut, this is overridden.

If the vehicle key is left in the luggage compartment and the

deck lid is closed, but the rest of the vehicle is locked, the latch

will not engage. The key must be removed from the luggage

compartment before the deck lid can be closed and latched.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 8 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Vehicle Security 2.9

Emergency Access and Start

Emergency Key

If the vehicle key fails to operate, or the vehicle battery is fully

discharged, use the emergency key to lock or unlock the vehicle.

Do not store the emergency key in the vehicle. If the vehicle

battery is fully discharged you will need the emergency key to

gain access to the vehicle.

If the emergency key is lost, contact your Aston Martin

Dealer.

The emergency door lock is always in the door handle for the

left side door.

Open the door handle and insert the emergency key in the door

lock and turn clockwise. Only that door will be unlocked. If the

security system was armed, the alarm will start. To stop the alarm

insert the vehicle key (even if the vehicle key has lost all power)

into the emergency ignition slot and move to position ‘II’ (ignition

ON).

Caution: If the vehicle has lost power, the door may

require extra effort to open due to the window not dropping

down. If this does happen, gently press against the top of the

window whilst opening the door.

Caution: If the vehicle battery is fully discharged, the

emergency key will only lock or unlock the left side door. The

right side door can be unlocked from inside the vehicle, but

unless power is supplied to the vehicle, that door cannot be

locked again.

Even if the vehicle key has lost all power it will start the engine

when used in the emergency ignition slot.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 9 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

2.10 Vehicle Security

Emergency Engine Start

If the keyless start system fails to start the vehicle, the engine can

be started with the emergency start system.

To start the engine:

1. Lift the battery cover (A).

2. Press the cap release button (B) and remove the key end cap

(C).

If the keyless ignition system fails, contact your Aston Martin

Dealer.

If the emergency ignition is used to start the vehicle, the

START button is disabled.

To turn the engine off, turn the key counter-clockwise in the

emergency ignition slot.

3. Move the armrest back to at least position "1" (Refer to

’Powered Storage Box’, page 3.31)to expose the cup

holders and the emergency ignition cover.

4. Remove the emergency ignition cover (D).

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 10 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Vehicle Security 2.11

5. Insert the key into the emergency ignition slot and turn the

key clockwise to start the vehicle.

The powered arm rest switch will not be able to fully close

when the vehicle key is in the emergency ignition slot.

Anti-Theft Systems

Introduction

This vehicle is protected by an electronic security system which

includes:

• Remote arm and disarm

• Perimeter sensing

• Remote door, deck lid, fuel flap release lock and unlock

• Alarm siren with battery backup (Only in markets where

audible sirens are permitted.)

• Random code encryption to prevent electronic scanning of

the vehicle key identity code

•Engine Immobiliser

• Interior movement and tilt (tow-away) sensor.

When the security system is armed, any attempt to forcibly open

a door, the deck lid or the hood will result in full alarm operation.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 11 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

2.12 Vehicle Security

Alarm

When the alarm has started a siren will be heard for a 25 seconds

cycle (ten cycles maximum) and the direction indicators flash

for

five minutes after which the security system returns to the armed

state. The doors and deck lid will stay locked throughout.

Stop the alarm at any time by pressing on the vehicle key or

setting the ignition control to position ‘II’ with the key in the

vehicle. There is approximately a ten second delay before the

alarm is stopped.

Engine Immobiliser

The engine immobilizer prevents your vehicle from being started

without the correct key.

The immobilizer system is activated when the ignition is set to off

and the driver's door is opened.

Caution: Always take the key with you when you lock the

vehicle. The engine can be started if a valid key has been left

inside the vehicle.

The immobilizer system is always deactivated when the

engine is started.

Interior Motion Sensor

When the vehicle is locked and armed, the interior motion sensor

will sense movement inside the vehicle. If movement is detected

it will start the alarm.

The interior motion sensor will activate 10 seconds after the

vehicle is locked and all doors are closed, and the alarm will be

set after a further 10 seconds of calibration.

All doors must be closed before the interior motion sensor

can be activated.

The interior motion sensor can be set on or off in the vehicle

settings menu (Refer to ’Vehicle Settings’, page 10.2).

Tow Away Protection

When the vehicle is locked and armed a tilt sensor will sense if

the vehicle is tilted or lifted. For example, if the vehicle is being

raised on a jack or being towed. If the vehicle tilt sensor detects

a tilt, the alarm will start.

Tow Away Protection will activate 60 seconds after the

vehicle is locked and all doors are closed.

All doors, including the deck lid, must be closed before tow

away protection can be activated.

Tow away protection can be set to on or off in the vehicle settings

menu (Refer to ’Vehicle Settings’, page 10.2).

Markets where visible alarm signals and audible sirens are permitted.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 12 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Vehicle Security 2.13

Garage Door Opener

(Optional)

The garage door opener (HomeLink® Universal Transceiver)

buttons and transceiver are on the rear view mirror. The

transceiver can be programmed to operate up to three

transmitters to operate garage doors, entry gates, home lights,

security systems, or other radio frequency operated devices.

Caution: As a security precaution make sure that all

programming is erased in the HomeLink system before selling

this vehicle.

For information or assistance, contact HomeLink at

www.homelink.com or call the HomeLink hot-line:

Toll-free: (0) 0800 046 635 465

or alternatively: +49 6838 907 277 (subject to charge)

(Difficulties may be experienced trying to reach the toll-free

number by some providers in certain countries .)

Alternatively, contact your Aston Martin Dealer.

Warning: Do not use the transceiver with any garage door

opening system that lacks the safety stop and reverse feature

as required by safety standards. A garage door opening

system which cannot detect an object, signalling the door to

stop and reverse increases risk of serious injury or death.

Warning: When the transceiver is being programmed to a

garage door opening system, make sure that people, the

vehicle and objects are clear to prevent injury or damage as

the garage door or gate will operate during the

programming.

A full list of radio frequency operated devices can be either

obtained via the HomeLink Hot-line or through the HomeLink

compatibility list which is provided on the HomeLink website.

Keep the original transmitter for future use or programming

procedures if, for example, you purchase a new vehicle.

This device may suffer from interference if operated near to a

mobile or fixed station transmitter. This interference can affect the

hand-held transmitter as well as the in-vehicle transceiver.

The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or TV

interference caused by unauthorized modifications to this

equipment. Such modifications could void the user’s authority to

operate the equipment.

FCC Warning: This device complies with FCC rules part

15 and Industry Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause

harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any

interference that may be received including interference that

may cause undesired operation.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 13 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

2.14 Vehicle Security

Warning: The transmitter has been tested and complies

with FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not

expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance

could void the user’s authority to operate the device. This

equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set

forth for an uncontrolled environment. End Users must

follow the specific operating instructions for satisfying RF

exposure compliance. This transmitter must be at least 20

cm from the user and must not be co-located or operating in

conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. The term

“IC:” before the certification/registration number only

signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were

met.

Programming

Step 1 erases all programming and is only necessary if

programming HomeLink for the first time or when erasing all

existing programming. It does not have to be followed to program

the other HomeLink buttons.

The HomeLink buttons can be reprogrammed individually but

not individually erased. Step 1 must be completed to erase all

programming.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 14 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Vehicle Security 2.15

1. Press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons, until the

HomeLink LED (A) begins to flash after 20 seconds.

All three buttons are now cleared. The HomeLink system is

now in setting mode.

2. Hold the remote control for the device to be programmed

at a distance of 10-30 cm away from the HomeLink

transmitter unit. The LED should be kept in view.

The distance between the remote control and the transmitter

unit depends on the system being programmed and several

attempts at different distances may be necessary.

3. Simultaneously push the remote control button and the

desired button (1, 2 or 3).

4. The LED will flash, first slowly and then rapidly to show

successful programming of the new frequency signal. When

the LED flashes rapidly, release both buttons.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 15 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

2.16 Vehicle Security

Operation

The vehicle should be within the operating range of the gate or

garage door opener and the ignition should be ON.

The HomeLink system operates the garage door opener (or other

device) in the same way as the original remote control.

With the system programmed, press the appropriate HomeLink

button (1, 2, or 3) to operate the garage door opener.

The LED will come ON when the button is pressed will stay ON

while the garage door opener (or other device) operates. If it does

not, your system may have a rolling code feature

The original remote control may also be used at any time.

Rolling Code Synchronisation

To check if the garage door opener (or other device) has a rolling

code feature:

• Check the garage door opener manual.

• The remote control programs the HomeLink system, bu

HomeLink buttons do not operate the garage door opener.

• Press and hold down the programmed HomeLink button.

For a rolling code system, the LED flashes quickly and then

stays ON constantly for two seconds. This pattern repeats

itself for up to 20 seconds.

To program a rolling code system, it must be synchronized with

this system again before it will function correctly.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 16 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Vehicle Security 2.17

To synchronize for a rolling code:

1. Locate the training or programming button on the motor

head unit for the garage door opener . Refer to the

operating instructions of the garage door opener.

2. Press the training button on the motor head unit for the

garage door opener. This will usually set a ‘training’ LED to

ON.

There will typically be a 30 second window in which to

initiate step 3.

3. Press and release the programmed HomeLink button. Press

and release the HomeLink button a second time to

complete synchronisation.

Some systems may require this procedure to be completed a

third time.

The garage door opener should now recognize the rolling code

signal and operate when the HomeLink button is pressed.

The next two buttons may now be programmed if this has not

previously been done.

Reprogramming

To program a HomeLink button to a new device:

1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button (1, 2, or 3) for

20 seconds until the LED starts flashing slowly. Do not

release the button until step 4 has been completed.

2. Hold the remote control for the device to be programmed

at a distance of 10-30 cm away from the HomeLink

transmitter unit. The LED should be kept in view.

3. Now press and hold the remote control button.

4. The LED will flash, first slowly and then rapidly to show

successful programming of the new frequency signal. When

the LED flashes rapidly, release both buttons.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 17 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

2.18 Vehicle Security

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 18 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Before Driving 3.1

Before Driving

Checks Before Driving...................................................3.2

Seat Adjustment............................................................3.2

Electric Windows ..........................................................3.5

Mirrors..........................................................................3.6

Steering Column ...........................................................3.8

Memory Functions ........................................................3.9

Occupant Restraint System..........................................3.10

Child Safety.................................................................3.18

Child Seat Installation..................................................3.24

Cabin Storage..............................................................3.30

Variable Load Space....................................................3.33

Accessory Sockets........................................................3.34

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 1 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

3.2 Before Driving

Checks Before Driving

Inspect your vehicle to make sure that everything is according to

the information and specifications in this Owner’s Guide.

Outside the Vehicle:

• Visually check the road wheels, wheel bolts and tires.

• Check that all windows, mirrors and lamps are clear and

unobstructed.

• Check that the deck lid, hood and fuel filler flap are securely

closed.

• Check the operation of all lamps.

Once Inside the Vehicle:

• Check that the doors are securely closed.

• Check that the seat, mirrors and steering wheel adjustments

are correct.

• Check that all gauges and symbols are reading correctly.

• Check that all passengers have fastened their seat belts.

Seat Adjustment

Front seats only.

Warning: Do not attempt to adjust the drivers seat whilst

driving.

The seats can be adjusted when the vehicle is at ignition position

"I" (ignition on, engine off).

The seats can also be adjusted:

• Up to six minutes after a door is unlocked and before the

ignition is switched on.

• Up to six minutes after the ignition is switched off.

If the seat operation times out:

• Turn the ignition control on.

• Close or open a door.

The seat adjustment controls are located each side of the centre

console.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 2 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Before Driving 3.3

Seat Controls

The ignition must be ON before the lumbar and bolster

support

can be operated.

[1] LUMBAR/BOLSTER ADJUSTMENT SELECTOR SWITCH:

Press the switch up to select lumbar adjustment. Press down to

select bolster adjustment

[2] LUMBAR/BOLSTER ADJUSTMENT: Use the directional pad

to adjust the position of the lumbar or bolster support

[3] SEAT POSITION ADJUST: Seat forward/backward and height

adjust. Raise front to tilt base of seat.

[4] SEAT BACKREST ADJUST: Seat back angle adjust.

[5] MEMORY SEAT POSITIONS: Use to select or store memory

positions for the seat, steering column and wing mirror positions

(Refer to ’Memory Functions’, page 3.9).

Optional

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 3 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

3.4 Before Driving

Seat Back Release

Caution: Make sure that the headrest for the seat does not

hit the sun visor. The seat can cause damage to the sun visor

or the sun visor mirror.

Pull the release strap (A) to release the seat back. Pull and hold to

move the rear of the seat forward.

Push the rear of the seat into position to lock it in place.

A warning message will be shown in the instrument cluster if

the seat is not correctly locked back into position.

Head Restraints

The driver and front passenger seats include non-adjustable head

restraints, which limit the rearward travel of the head in a rear

impact and may reduce whip lash injuries. When sitting in the

seats make sure that the seat back is in an upright position and

that the rear of the occupant's head is positioned in the centre of

the head restraint area. The head restraints are most effective

when the distance between the rear of the occupant's head and

the head restraint is kept to a minimum.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 4 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Before Driving 3.5

Electric Windows

Warning: Misuse of the window switches, especially by

children, can result in injury due to entrapment in the

window closure. Drivers must advise all passengers of the

possible danger and make sure that all obstructions are clear

before raising the window.

The windows can be operated up to one minute after the

ignition is turned off.

To raise and lower the windows the ignition must be at position

‘I’ or ‘II’.

Press a window switch on the driver's side (A) or the passenger's

side (B) to lower the window.

Press or pull past resistance on the window switch to perform a

one-touch movement down or up.

Pull the window switch back to raise the window.

If power to the electric windows has been interrupted for any

reason, they will fail to operate correctly until reset.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 5 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

3.6 Before Driving

Door Sealing

Warning: Make sure that all passengers are clear when

the window mechanism is operating.

To minimize wind noise and to make sure that the window seal

is watertight, a door sealing system is used to provide a tight fit of

the door glass to the seals around the top of the door opening.

The window automatically lowers a small distance to clear the

door seal when a door is opened. When the door is closed, the

window automatically lifts against the body frame rubber seals.

Window Anti-Trap

The door windows use an anti-trap mechanism to prevent

accidental closure of a window on vulnerable parts of the body

or other obstructions. When the window motor sense an

obstruction, the window stops closing and then opens to release

the obstruction.

Mirrors

Interior Mirrors

Automatic Dim

Adjust the mirror (A) on its ball mounting until a satisfactory rear

view is obtained.

The rear view mirror will dim automatically if the glare from the

headlamps of following vehicles becomes too bright. The mirror

will return to normal view as unwanted glare reduces to an

acceptable level.

Vanity Mirror

A vanity mirror (B) is located in each sun visor. Fold the sun visor

down and slide the cover to view the mirror.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 6 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Before Driving 3.7

Exterior Mirrors

To adjust the exterior mirrors press the mirror switch (A) left or

right to select a side to adjust. Move the direction pad (B) up,

down, left or right to adjust the selected mirror.

The ignition control must be at position ‘I’ or ‘II’ before the

door mirrors can be adjusted.

Heated Mirrors

When the heated rear window is ON the heaters in the door

mirrors will operate for 6.5 minutes.

Mirror Fold

To fold the mirrors, press and hold the mirror switch (A) to the left

or right.

Auto-Fold

When the vehicle is locked using the vehicle key or master lock

switch the mirrors will automatically fold in flat against the doors.

The mirrors will return to the driving position once the vehicle is

unlocked.

This function can be enabled or disabled in the systems settings

menu (Refer to ’Vehicle Settings’, page 10.2).

Memory Function

The position of the exterior mirrors is stored when a seating

position is saved for the driver's seat (Refer to ’Vehicle Settings’,

page 10.2).

Reverse Dip Function

To set a position for the reverse dip mirror, use the mirror switch

to set a position for the passenger side mirror with reverse gear

selected. The mirror will now move to the position when reverse

gear is selected, if the driver's side mirror is not selected. If the

driver's side mirror is selected the mirror will not move. Select the

passenger side mirror to dip the passenger side mirror.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 7 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

3.8 Before Driving

Steering Column

Adjustment

Warning: Do not adjust the steering wheel whilst driving.

The steering column can be adjusted with the ignition set to

OFF.

The reach and tilt angle of the steering column are adjusted by

using the adjustment lever. Push the release lever down or up to

adjust the steering column angle. Pull the lever towards you to

bring the steering wheel closer and away to move the steering

wheel back.

Heated Steering Wheel

The ignition control must be at position ‘I’ or ‘II’ before the

heated steering wheel can be operated.

To set the steering wheel heating to on, rotate the dial on the

adjustment lever counter-clockwise. The indicator LED lamp will

also come on.

To turn the steering wheel heating off, rotate the dial clockwise.

The steering wheel heating is always set to off when the

ignition is set to OFF.

Memory Function

The position of the steering column is stored when a seating

position is saved for the driver's seat (Refer to ’Memory

Functions’, page 3.9).

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 8 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Before Driving 3.9

Memory Functions

Warning: Make sure that there is nothing in the

movement path of the seat or the steering column during

adjustment that could cause obstruction.

Warning: To avoid injury, make sure that children do not

play with the memory position switches.

Warning: If the seat or steering column accidentally begin

to move, press any seat control button to stop the seat.

Lumbar and Bolster positions are not recorded when memory

positions are saved.

The position of the driver and front passenger seats, steering

column and exterior mirrors can be memorized and recalled.

Three different driving position profiles can be entered in the

memory. The memory position of the steering column and both

door rear view mirrors are saved in the driver’s seat position.

Setting a Memory Position

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 9 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

3.10 Before Driving

Driver's Seat

Warning: Do not attempt to adjust the seat whilst driving.

Adjust the seat, steering column and the door rear view mirrors

to the desired position. Push the memory button (M), then press

the required memory channel (1, 2 or 3) to save the positions. A

chime is heard and a message will show in the message centre to

confirm. By repeating these steps and pressing an unused button,

a second and third driving position can be saved in the memory.

Front Passenger's Seat

Adjust the seat to the desired position. Push the memory button

(M), then press the required memory channel (1, 2 or 3) to save

the positions. By repeating these steps and pressing an unused

button, a second and third seating position can be stored in the

memory.

Recalling a Memory Position

Once in the seat press and hold button 1, 2 or 3 (depending on

which saved channel is required) until all movement is stopped.

The seat will move to the saved position.

Seat and steering wheel movement will be interrupted if the

memory channel button is released. Exterior mirror movement

will continue. Press and hold the memory channel button to

complete seat and steering wheel movement.

Emergency Stop

If the seat accidentally begins to move, press any seat control

button to stop the seat.

Occupant Restraint System

The system provides protection to the driver and all passengers in

a variety of impact conditions.

The system consists of:

• Driver and front passenger safety belts with dual pre-

tensioners and load limiting systems.

• Driver and front passenger dual-stage airbags.

• Driver and front passenger seat side airbags.

• Driver and front passenger roof mounted curtain airbag

(coupe).

• Driver and front door mounted curtain airbag (volante).

• Driver and front passenger knee bolster airbags.

• Roll Over Protection System (ROPS) (volante)

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 10 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Before Driving 3.11

All of these systems are controlled by the Occupant Restraint

Controller (ORC). In a collision the ORC will analyse information

from various sensors, such as crash and seat occupancy

conditions. Based on this information the system will deploy the

appropriate safety devices. During a crash, the ORC may or may

not operate the safety belt pre-tensioner(s) and none, one, or

both stages of the dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints.

If the pre-tensioners or airbags do not operate in a collision it

does not mean that something is wrong with the system. Rather,

it means the system determined the accident conditions (crash

severity, belt usage, etc.) were not appropriate to operate these

safety devices.

Front airbags are designed to operate only in frontal and near-

frontal collisions, not rollovers, side-impacts, or rear-impacts

unless the collision causes sufficient longitudinal deceleration.

Determining if the System is Operational

The ORC warning symbol is shown in the instrument cluster

to give the condition of the system. A fault with the system is

shown by one or more of the following:

• The warning symbol will flash or stay ON.

• The warning symbol does not come ON immediately after the

ignition is set to ON.

• A message will show in the right side instrument cluster

window with a description of the fault.

If either of these conditions occur, even intermittently, have the

restraint system serviced at your Aston Martin Dealer

immediately. Unless serviced, the system may not operate

correctly in the event of a collision.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 11 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

3.12 Before Driving

Seat Belts

Warning: Seat belts should not be worn with straps

twisted.

Warning: Seat belts are designed for adults; infants and

smaller children must be restrained in an approved child

safety seat.

Warning: Each belt assembly must only be used by one

occupant; it is dangerous to put a belt around a child being

carried on the passengers lap. Do not put an adult seat belt

around two children.

Warning: When installed, the seat belt webbing must not

contact any sharp edges which could abrade or cut the

webbing during normal use or in an accident. If necessary,

the webbing must be protected.

Warning: Care should be taken to avoid contamination of

the webbing with polishes, oils and chemicals, and

particularly battery acid. Cleaning may safely be carried out

using mild soap and water. The belt should be replaced if

webbing becomes frayed, contaminated or damaged.

Warning: Wearing your seat belt is crucial to your safety.

Not wearing a seat belt increases chance of serious injury or

death in the event of an accident.

Warning: Be sure that you and your passengers always

fasten their seat belts and use them correctly even though

airbags are provided.

Warning: Reclining the seat back decreases protection

provided by the seat belt in the event of a crash. Adjust the

seat back to an upright position. Make sure that the seat

back is locked in place, otherwise it could move forward in

the event of a sudden stop or crash and cause injury.

Warning: Seat belts are designed to bear upon the bony

structure of the body, and should be worn low across the

front of the pelvis, chest and shoulders; wearing the lap

section of the belt across the abdominal area must be

avoided.

Warning: Never place the shoulder portion of belt under

your arm or behind your back.

Warning: Always remove rigid or breakable objects i.e.

spectacles or a mobile phone, from your pockets. These

items could be trapped under seat belts, possibly causing

injury in the event of an accident.

Warning: Expectant mothers should seek medical advice

on the most appropriate way to wear the seat belt.

Warning: Seat belts must be kept clean so that the

retractor works correctly. Make sure that belt webbing is not

twisted, looped, frayed or obstructed in any way. If in doubt

about condition or operation of seat belt installation, have it

checked by your Aston Martin Dealer.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 12 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Before Driving 3.13

Warning: No modifications or additions should be made

by the user which will either prevent seat belt adjusting

devices from operating, or prevent seat belt assembly from

being adjusted to remove slack. Never install accessories on

your seat belts.

Warning: Seat belts should be adjusted as firmly as

possible, consistent with comfort, to provide the protection

for which they have been designed. A slack belt will greatly

reduce the protection afforded to the wearer.

Warning: It is essential to replace the entire seat belt

assembly after it has been worn in a severe impact even if

damage to the seat belt assembly is not obvious.

Warning: If it is necessary to replace a seat belt on this

vehicle then it MUST be replaced with an approved seat belt.

The approved seat belts for the front seats must also include

a load limiting system.

Pre-tensioner and Load Limiting

Front seat belts are equipped with dual pre-tensioners and load

limiting systems.

In most moderate frontal or near frontal accidents, the front

airbag and all pre-tensioner systems will deploy simultaneously.

The pre-tensioners take up slack in the seat belts as the airbags

are expanding. The load limiting system releases belt webbing in

a controlled manner to reduce belt force on a passenger’s chest.

In some moderate frontal or near frontal accidents, only the

pre-tensioner system will deploy.

Seat Belt Reminder

The seat belt reminder warning symbol in the instrument

cluster will come ON and warning sound will be heard for

six seconds (approximately) when the ignition is set to ON if the

driver or passenger

seat belt is not fastened. (Market dependent.)

If the driver seat belt is not fastened after 60 seconds or if the

vehicle has reached a speed of 25 km/h, a warning sound will be

heard for 30 seconds, after which the warning sound will go ON

and OFF and the warning symbol will continue to show until the

seat belt is fastened.

If a passenger is sitting in the front passenger seat.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 13 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

3.14 Before Driving

Seat Belt Fastening

When parked on an incline, the seat belt may lock as it is

withdrawn. This is not a fault. If the mechanism locks, release the

belt tension and then pull the belt very gently to avoid operation

of the inertia lock.

Each seat has three point, inertia reel seat belts installed. Items 1,

2 and 3 show the three points of the seat belt. Item 3 is also the

location of the belt buckle.

The inertia belt reels will automatically tension the belts to

provide security with comfort. In the event of a collision or during

severe braking, the belt reels will lock.

To test the locking function of the retractor, quickly pull the seat

belt forward. If the seat belt does not lock, consult your Aston

Martin dealer

Pull out the seat belt, drawing the buckle over the shoulder and

across the chest.

Push the buckle into the belt buckle latch until a positive click is

heard.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 14 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Before Driving 3.15

Pull upwards on the diagonal belt to make sure that the latching

is secure and to remove all slack from the belt.

Check that the lap belt is installed snugly, low down across the

hips, and that there are no twists.

If it is necessary for a passenger to adjust their seat or seating

position during a journey, the belt tension might be disturbed.

The passenger should therefore (as soon as it is safe to do so)

gently pull down the shoulder run of the seat belt to create some

slack and then immediately release it to re-tension the belt for the

new seating position.

Seat Belt Unfastening

Push the button on the buckle. While holding the seat belt

buckle, allow the belt to slowly retract to its stored position.

Warning: Do not allow the belt to twist, or be looped,

frayed or obstructed in any way when the seat belt is

retracted back into its stowage position.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 15 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

3.16 Before Driving

Airbags

The purpose of the airbags is to provide additional protection for

the driver and passengers in the event of a serious impact (front

or side impacts). The airbags are supplementary to the seat belts.

Important airbag safety labels are located on the sun visors and

on the end of the instrument panel (passenger side). Make sure

that the instructions on these labels are read and complied with

before driving the vehicle.

The front driver's (A), passenger (B) and knee bolster airbag (C)

only deploy in a serious front collision.

The side airbags (D) located in the front seats and the curtain

airbag (E) located in the roof trim

or door

, only deploy

according to which side has been impacted in a serious side

collision.

Coupe Only

Volante Only

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 16 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Before Driving 3.17

Airbag Deployment

Warning: The use of accessory seat covers may prevent

the deployment of the seat side airbags and increase the risk

of injury in an accident. Do not use accessory seat covers.

Warning: All passengers, including the driver, should

always wear seat belts, whether or not an airbag is provided,

to decrease the risk of injury or death in the event of a crash.

Warning: No objects whatsoever should be attached to,

or placed on, the centre cover of the steering wheel or the

front passenger fascia panel. Such objects could cause harm

if the vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the

airbags to deploy.

The airbag system is not designed to protect against rear

impacts.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 17 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

3.18 Before Driving

Airbags inflate rapidly and with considerable force; there is

therefore a risk of death or serious injury such as fractures, facial

and eye injuries or internal injuries, particularly to passengers

who are not correctly restrained by seat belts or are not sitting

correctly when the airbags deploy. The risk of injury from a

deploying airbag is greatest close to the trim panel covering the

airbag.

The whole sequence of events from sensing the impact to full

inflation of the airbag takes place in a fraction of a second.

Do not change, modify or tamper with the steering wheel,

passenger side fascia or any other part of the airbag system. Such

actions could disable the system or cause inadvertent airbag

deployment.

The system will not deploy in the event of minor frontal or side

impacts, such as contacts when parking.

All work on the airbag system must only be carried out by an

Aston Martin Dealer.

Child Safety

Aston Martin Strongly Recommends:

• That all children are sat in the rear passenger seats.

• Always use the Child Restraint Anch

orage System (CRAS)

where available.

• Only one child seat be installed to the passenger side of

the vehicle at any time.

• A child, regardless of age, should always be restrained

when travelling in a vehicle.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 18 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Before Driving 3.19

Warning: Accident statistics show that children are

generally safer when correctly restrained in the rear seat

than in the front seat. A suitable child restraint, correctly

installed and used, provides the highest degree of protection

for infants and small children in most accident situations.

Warning: Do not allow children to travel in a vehicle

without being correctly restrained. An appropriate child seat

or harness should always be used.

Warning: Each seat belt assembly must be used by only

one passenger. It is dangerous to put a seat belt around a

child being carried on the passengers lap.

Warning: Make sure that an installed child seat does not

rest against the door, that the child sits correctly in the seat

and does not lean close to, or against, the door or window.

Your vehicle has the following devices for the installation of child

restraints:

• Front passenger seat with Occupant Classification System

(OCS) (Refer to ’Occupant Classification System’, page 3.20)

and top tether.

• Rear seat Child Restraint Anchorage System (CRAS) (Refer to

’Rear Child Seat Installation’, page 3.26).

• Passenger seat Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belts.

Child Seat Belt Fastening

Warning: An infant or child that is not correctly

restrained can be seriously injured or killed in a crash. Seat

belts are designed for adults; infants and smaller children

must be restrained in an approved child safety seat.

Make sure that there is no slack in the webbing and that the

restraint installs correctly across the child's rib cage and hips.

These are the parts of the body most able to take the force of

impact.

The lap strap should pass across the top of the child’s thighs,

bearing on the pelvis, not on the abdominal area.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 19 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

3.20 Before Driving

Warning Labels

Warning: Extreme Hazard: NEVER use a rearward facing

child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in

front of it. DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the Child can

occur.

Warning labels are located on both driver and passenger sun

visors and on the passenger end of the instrument panel.

[A] : US Variant

[B] : Canada Variant

Occupant Classification System

The Occupant Classification System (OCS) is part of Occupant

restraints Control (ORC) System and operates in addition to the

restraints system. OCS is designed to meet the regulatory

requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS)

208 to set the front passenger airbag to OFF under certain

conditions.

OCS uses capacitive measurement to differentiate between

adults, occupied small (1 year old or younger) child restraint

seats, and empty seats. Capacitive measurement is not weight

sensitive and depends on chemical and physical features to

determine if an object or a person is in the passenger seat. This

information is then sent to the ORC module.

If OCS determines an adult is in the passenger seat, the passenger

airbag will be active.

If OCS determines there is an occupied child restraint seats (CRS)

present, or the seat is empty, the passenger airbag will be

automatically switched off.

If it is necessary to modify the advanced restraints system to

accommodate a person with disabilities, contact your Aston

Martin Dealer at the phone number shown in the dealer directory

of this owner’s guide.

If the front passenger seat is occupied by an adult, the PASS

AIRBAG status symbol will be set to (A).

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 20 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Before Driving 3.21

The passenger airbag will be set to off if:

• The front passenger seat is unoccupied.

• The measured capacitance is less than that of a typical 1 (one)

year old infant and any CRS listed in FMVSS 208

If the airbag is set to off, the PASS AIRBAG status symbol will also

be set to (B).

The PASS AIRBAG OFF symbol will come on for a short period

when the ignition is switched on to confirm it is ready.

Warnings

Warning: Important OCS components, such as the

capacitive sensor and control unit, are installed in the front

passenger seat. Suitable precautions must be take to prevent

these components from being damaged. Any damage to the

seat trim, such as cuts that have penetrated the trim

material, must be inspected by an Aston Martin Dealer. The

system must also be checked for corrected functionality.

depending on the level of damage, OCS components may

require replacement and the system checked again. OCS

functionality cannot be warranted if the seat is damaged.

Warning: To prevent damage to the OCS and other seat

components, do not kneel on, or apply concentrated

pressure to, the front seats. Do not put sharp items on the

seats.

Warning: Never remove the front passenger seat from the

vehicle or remove the seat trim. Never dismantle, remove

parts off the seat or disconnect wires from the seat. Any

incorrect repair or disassembly of the front passenger seat

can prevent the OCS from functioning correctly.

Warning: Do not install any additional seat accessories,

such as beaded trims or padding, or use cushions, blankets

or similar items on the front passenger seat under an

occupant. Additional items such as these may increase the

distance between passenger and seat and cause the OCS to

incorrectly classify the occupant and give incorrect airbag

functionality.

Passenger Seat Airbag PASS AIRBAG STATUS SYMBOL

Empty Off

Child + Child Seat Off

Adult On

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 21 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

3.22 Before Driving

Warning: Use only approved cleaning materials to clean

the vehicle interior surfaces. Solvents or other incorrect

cleaning products on the surface where the sensor is located

(under the leather of the cushion) can damage the sensor.

Warning: Spilt water or steam cleaning the seat can cause

the OCS to incorrectly classify a seat occupant. Wait for the

seat to dry completely before use. Make sure that there are

no wet objects (such as wet towels), water or other liquids

on the front passenger seat cushion.

Warning: Do not place objects on the front passenger

seat. The capacitive sensor is not a weight sensor, but

increased weight on the seat can cause the trim to become

thinner and change the capacitance. Objects on the front

passenger seat can cause the OCS to incorrectly classify a

seat occupant and give incorrect airbag functionality.

Always check the airbag status lamp.

Warning: Do not charge electrical devices on the

passenger seat, whether it is empty or if a CRS is installed.

This can cause the OCS to incorrectly classify the

capacitance as a seat occupant and give incorrect airbag

functionality. Always check the airbag status lamp.

Warning: Do not put shopping bags on the passenger

seat. A large amount of liquid, such as bottled water, can

cause the OCS to incorrectly classify the capacitance as a

seat occupant and give incorrect airbag functionality. Always

check the airbag status lamp.

Warning: Incorrect installation of a child seat may cause

the passenger sensing system to leave the front airbag set to

on. Always make sure that child seats are correctly installed

on the seat. Read the child seat manufacturer’s installation

instructions.

Warning: Even with the advanced restraints system,

children aged 12 and under should be correctly restrained in

the rear seats.

Warning: Do not hang objects off the front seat backrest

if a child is in the front passenger seat.

Warning: Always check the PASS AIRBAG status symbol

for correct airbag status.

Warning: Any alteration or modification to the front

passenger seat may affect the performance of the OCS.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 22 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Before Driving 3.23

Seating Position

Warning: Always sit upright against the seat backrest and

with both feet on the floor. If you do not sit correctly or with

the seat backrest reclined too far this can alter the

capacitance read by the OCS and affect the functionality of

the front passenger sensing system, resulting in serious

injury or death in a crash.

After all passengers have adjusted their seats and put on safety

belts, its very important that they continue to sit correctly. A

correctly seated passenger sits upright, leaning against the seat

backrest, and centred on the seat cushion, with their feet

comfortably extended on the floor. Sitting incorrectly can

increase the chance of injury in a crash event. For example, if a

passenger slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans

forward or side ways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of

injury during a crash is greatly increased.

If a person of adult size is sitting in the front passenger’s seat and

the PASS AIRBAG symbol is , it is possible that the person is

not sitting correctly in the seat.

If this happens:

1. Set the ignition to off. Ask the person to place the seat

backrest in the full upright position.

2. Have the person sit upright in the seat, centred on the seat

cushion, with the person’s legs comfortably extended.

3. Start the engine and have the person stay in this position for

about two minutes. This will let the system detect th

person and set the passenger’s front airbag to on.

4. If the PASS AIRBAG symbol stays even after this, the

person should be advised to sit in a rear seat. (If available)

These conditions can cause the weight of a correctly seated

passenger to be incorrectly interpreted by the front passenger

sensing system. The person in the front passenger seat can appear

heavier or lighter due to the conditions described.

If the PASS AIRBAG symbol stays , this may or may not be a

problem due to the front passenger sensing system.

Do not attempt to repair or service the system. Take the vehicle

immediately to the nearest Aston Martin Dealer.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 23 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

3.24 Before Driving

Child Seat Installation

Top Tether Information

Warning: An infant or child that is not properly restrained

can be seriously injured or killed in a crash. Seat belts are

designed for adults and larger children; infants and smaller

children must be restrained in an approved child safety seat.

Warning: Child restraint anchorages are designed to

withstand only those loads imposed by correctly installed

child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used

for adult seatbelts, harnesses or for attaching other items or

equipment to the vehicle.

Warning: Always follow the child seat manufacturer’s

instructions. Not following the child seat manufacturer’s

instructions when installing the child seat is dangerous.

Warning: Make sure the child seat tether strap is free

from obstructions above and below. Do not place any items

on the tether strap between the child seat and the tether

anchor point. Do not place tether strap over any items

between the child seat and the tether anchor point.

A tether is a strap that connects the top of a child seat to a tether

anchor point on the vehicle to reduce excessive movement of the

child seat in the event of a collision. The purpose of a tether strap

is to provide additional protection for the child seat occupant in

the event of a serious impact. The tether strap is supplementary

to the seat belts.

Your vehicle has a tether anchor point for the front seat and both

rear passenger seats.

Front Child Seat Installation

Warning: Even with the advanced restraints system,

children aged 12 and under should be correctly restrained in

the rear seats.

Warning: Always follow the child seat manufacturer’s

instructions for correct installation. Not following the child

seat manufacturer’s instructions when installing the child

seat is dangerous.

Warning: All child restraint systems are designed to be

secured in vehicle seats by the lap and shoulder belt portion

of a safety belt. Children could be endangered in a crash if

their child restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle.

The Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) system is designed to

securely hold child seats. The ALR system temporarily locks a seat

belt that is securing a child seat.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 24 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Before Driving 3.25

ALR Operation

Gently pull out the seat belt until fully extended. The ALR system

will only engage at the maximum extension point of the seat belt.

Thread the belt tongue through the child seat as per the child seat

manufacturer instructions. Engage the tongue into the belt

buckle.

Adjust the tongue position on the belt to make sure that the lower

belt run is tight and then allow the upper run of the seat belt to

fully retract until the child seat is securely held. The ALR system

will be heard ‘clicking’ as the seat belt retracts.

When fully retracted, pull down on the upper run of the belt to

check that the ALR lock has engaged.

When parked on an incline, the seat belt may lock as it is

withdrawn. This is not a fault. If the mechanism locks, release the

seat belt tension and then pull the seat belt very gently to avoid

operation of the inertia lock.

The ALR system will disengage when the seat belt is fully

retracted. The seat belt may then be worn when required as a

normal seat belt. Once the ALR is disengaged, the seat belt must

be fully extended to re-engage the system on the next occasion

that a child seat is installed.

Front Passenger Seat Installation

To install a child seat to the front seat using the seat belt, use the

procedure that follows:

1. Move the passenger seat to its fully rearward and highes

position. Lower the front of the seat cushion to its lowest

position.

2. Recline the back of the seat as necessary.

3. Follow the child seat manufacturers instructions and install

the child seat into the passenger seat.

4. Raise the seat back until the child seat is supported by the

back of the passenger seat.

Warning: If the Occupant Classification System (OCS)

does

not set the passenger airbag to OFF, the passenger

airbag will be active. Never use a child seat in the front

passenger seat with the passenger airbag active.

5. Confirm the OCS has set the passenger airbag to OFF (Refer

to ’Occupant Classification System’, page 3.20).

If stays ON even after this, install the child seat to a

rear seat (if possible).

6. Install the top tether to secure the child seat.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 25 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

3.26 Before Driving

Top Tether

The tether anchor point for the passenger seat is located at the

rear base of the passenger seat. Move the seat forward to access

the tether anchor point. Route the tether strap through the

opening in the seat back as shown.

Engage the tether clip to the anchor point at the bottom of the

passenger seat back (A) and make sure that the locking spring has

fully closed to prevent accidental disengagement. Always make

sure that the tether strap length is adjusted to remove any slack.

The tether anchor adjuster (B) must go through the opening.

Any adjustment must be made from the rear of the seat.

Rear Child Seat Installation

The rear seats for this vehicle use a Child Restraint Anchor System

(CRAS). CRAS consists of both lower fixing anchors and a top

tether to safely secure a child seat into a vehicle seat.

Warning: An unsecured child seat is dangerous. In a

sudden stop or a collision it could move, causing serious

injury or death to the child or other passengers. Make sure

the child seat is correctly secured in place according to the

manufacturer’s instructions.

Warning: When installing the child seat, make sure that

there are no seat belts or foreign objects near or around the

CRAS anchors. If seat belts or a foreign object prevents the

child seat from being securely attached to the CRAS anchors,

the child seat could move in a sudden stop or collision

causing serious injury or death to the child or other

passengers.

Warning: The child seat top tether must always be used

when installing a child seat with CRAS anchors.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 26 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Before Driving 3.27

This CRAS anchors are located between the seat base and the

seat back. The position of the anchors is shown by two tags at the

base of each rear seat.

Remove the lower seat back panel (A).

The seat back trim panels are left and right handed.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 27 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

3.28 Before Driving

Following the child seat manufacturer's instructions to secure the

child seat using the CRAS anchors (B).

Top Tether

The tether anchor point for the rear passenger seat is located

behind the top of the rear seats. The covers for the anchors are

embossed with the tether anchor symbol.

Push down on the front of the cover for the tether anchor to

release the spring clip.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 28 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Before Driving 3.29

Remove the cover for the tether anchor (B)

Engage the tether clip to the anchor point at the top of the parcel

shelf (C) and make sure that the locking spring has fully closed to

prevent accidental disengagement. Always make sure that the

tether strap length is adjusted to remove any slack.

To refit the cover for the tether anchor, insert the two tabs into

the slots. Push down on the front of the cover to lock.

Front Passenger Seat Position

When a child seat is installed to the rear seat using CRAS, you

must move the seat directly in front of the child seat depending

on the size seat being installed.

1. Move the back of the seat directly in front of the child seat

to its fully forward and lowest position.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 29 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

3.30 Before Driving

2. Move the base of the seat to its highest position.

3. Adjust the back of the seat to it's fully forward position.

Cabin Storage

Door Pockets

Both front doors have door pockets.

Do not use the door pocket to store items that could easily

fall out when the door is opened, such as mobile phones or

wallets.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 30 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Before Driving 3.31

Front Trinket Tray

There is a small trinket tray below the centre console for small

item storage.

Do not store any items in the trinket tray that may cover the

hazard warning switch.

Powered Storage Box

Pull the storage box switch (A) back to move the arm rest back

from position 0 (closed) to position 1 (cup holders) or position 2

(storage tray)

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 31 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

3.32 Before Driving

Position 1 (Cup Holders)

Position 1 for the powered storage box gives access to a storage

tray with two cup holders. Press to open and close the cup

holders.

This position also gives access to emergency ignition switch (Refer

to ’Emergency Engine Start’, page 2.10).

Warning: Only use the cup holder when safe to do so.

Warning: Do not place hot drinks in the cup holder while

the vehicle is in motion. There is a risk of scalding if spilled.

Warning: Use soft cups only. Hard cups or objects can

cause personal injury in a collision.

Caution: Do not put open top drinks containers in the cup

holders. There is a risk of spillage under heavy braking or

steering which can damage electrical components.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 32 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Before Driving 3.33

Position 2 (Storage Tray)

Position 2 for the powered storage box gives access to a large

storage area, as well as an SD card port, two USB ports and a 12V

accessory power socket.

Variable Load Space

(Volante Only)

This vehicle has a variable load space device installed that, when

the convertible roof is raised, increases the available luggage

capacity.

Operation

The variable load space divider can only be used with the

convertible roof in it's raised position.

To open the load space push the handle up. This will provide an

increase in storage space of approximately 40 litres. When the

variable load space divider is in it's raised position, you will not

be able to lower the convertible roof.

A warning will be shown in the instrument cluster if the roof

switch is press and the divider is raised.

To lower the variable load space divider, pull the handle down.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 33 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

3.34 Before Driving

Accessory Sockets

Warning: Only connect accessories which are designed

for use in a motor vehicle with a 12V electrical system. The

electrical system could become damaged if there is more

than 10A used from the accessory socket. Always read the

manufacturer’s instructions and make sure that you do not

connect any device which can exceed the rating of the

accessory socket.

Caution: Always use the cover for the accessory socket

when not in use. Items can get into the socket and cause

damage.

Extended use of an accessory socket when the vehicle engine

is set to OFF will discharge the battery.

There is an accessory socket located in the front storage tray in

the cabin. They may be used to power any 12 volt vehicle

accessory requiring a current of less than 10 amps.

Ashtray and Cigar Lighter

(Optional)

Warning: The cigar lighter will be very hot when in use.

Always hold the cigar lighter by the handle and always make

sure that the cigar lighter is out of reach of children. Never

leave children unattended in a vehicle that has a cigar

lighter.

Warning: Do not become distracted while driving, and

always be fully aware of all driving conditions. Only use the

cigar lighter when road and traffic conditions allow. Failure

to avoid potentially hazardous situations could result in an

accident or collision resulting in death or serious injury.

The cigar lighter can be used in the cabin accessory socket when

the ignition is in position ‘I’ or ‘II’.

Push the lighter down until it clicks. The lighter will pop up when

ready for use.

The ashtray installs into the cup holders.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 34 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Controls

Instrument Display ........................................................4.2

Centre Stack Controls....................................................4.5

Steering Wheel Controls..............................................4.12

Instrument Cluster Menu.............................................4.13

Voice Control..............................................................4.16

Wiper Controls............................................................4.17

Lighting Controls .........................................................4.18

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 1 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

4.2 Controls

Instrument Display

Information and Warnings

The left instrument display is used to provide warnings and

important information for the running of the vehicle.

[1] ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE (EPB) MALFUNCTION:

This symbol shows if there is a fault with the electronic

park brake. A warning message will also show in the right

instrument cluster window. Contact your Aston Martin Dealer as

soon as possible.

[2] PARK:

This symbol shows when the electric park brake is applied

and goes off when the electric park brake is fully released

[3] LAMP FAILURE:

Shows when a lamp has failed. Have the system checked

by an Aston Martin Dealer.

[4] SEAT BELT REMINDER:

Warning: Do not drive the vehicle if the seat belt

warning symbol stays ON. Have the system checked by an

Aston Martin Dealer.

This warning symbol will come on and a chime will sound for six

seconds if the driver’s seat belt is not fastened when the ignition

is set to on. The chime will continue to operate at different

vehicle speeds until the seat belt is fastened

Market dependant

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 2 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Controls 4.3

[5] OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROL (ORC)

WARNING LIGHT:

Warning: Do not drive the vehicle if the ORC warning

symbol stays ON. Have the system checked by an Aston

Martin Dealer.

At Ignition position I or II this symbol will briefly come on to do a

systems test and then turn off. If it does not come on, or if it

comes on and stays on, or if it comes on whilst driving, the

restraint system has detected a fault.

[6] ELECTRIC POWER ASSISTED STEERING (EPAS):

Warning: Do not drive the vehicle if the EPAS

warning symbol stays ON. Have the system checked by an

Aston Martin Dealer.

This symbol shows there is a fault with the EPAS system. Consult

your Aston Martin Dealer as soon as possible.

[7] MALFUNCTION INDICATION LAMP:

Steady amber shows a fault in the engine management

system. Continue driving only if there are no audible, visible or

physical signs of degraded engine performance. Consult your

Aston Martin Dealer as soon as possible.

Flashing amber shows a major fault in the engine management

system. Stop immediately. Contact your Aston Martin Dealer.

[8] TIRE PRESSURE:

If this symbol stays on or comes on while driving, a tire or

tires' air pressure is below specification

[9] ELECTRONIC STABILITY PROGRAM (ESP) :

When ESP is on this symbol will flash when the ESP is

operating. If, while ESP is on, the ESP symbol stays on or it comes

on whilst driving, the ESP system has detected a fault. A ESP fault

message will show in the message centre. Consult your Aston

Martin Dealer as soon as possible

[10] ABS:

Warning: If the ABS warning symbol stays ON, do

not drive the vehicle. Have the system checked by an Aston

Martin Dealer.

At Ignition position I or II this symbol will briefly come on to do a

systems test and then turn off. If this symbol stays on or comes on

while driving there is a fault in the ABS control circuits. Continue

driving only if there are no audible, visible or physical signs of

degraded brake performance. Consult your Aston Martin Dealer

as soon as possible if this symbol stays on.

[11] BRAKE WARNING or : (Symbols is

market dependant)

If either symbol stays on, there may be a fault with the braking

system (Refer to ’Brake Warnings’, page 5.17).

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 3 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

4.4 Controls

Instrument Cluster Overview

[1] ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE:

Shows the engine coolant temperature.

[2] FUEL GAUGE:

Shows how much fuel is left in the fuel tank (Refer to ’Fuel Level

Warnings’, page 12.61).

[3] TACHOMETER:

Shows the engine speed in revolutions per minute x 1000.

Changes to speedometer when cruise control is set.

[4] INSTRUMENT CLUSTER MENU:

Shows an auxiliary screen for a number of vehicle functions

(Refer to ’Instrument Cluster Menu’, page 4.13).

Warning messages will also appear in the right side of the

instrument cluster.

[5] OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE:

Shows the outside temperature.

[6] DRIVE MODE SETTING:

Shows which drive mode the vehicle is in (Refer to ’Drive

Modes’, page 5.10).

[7] COMBINED SPEEDOMETER AND GEAR INDICATOR:

Central gauge that displays vehicle speed and the current

selected gear.

[8] ADAPTIVE DAMPING SYSTEM (ADS) SETTING:

Shows which ADS mode the vehicle is in (Refer to ’Adaptive

Damping’, page 5.15).

[9] CLOCK:

Shows the time.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 4 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Controls 4.5

Centre Stack Controls

[1] ENGINE START/STOP:

Press to start or stop the engine.

[2] TRANSMISSION CONTROL BUTTONS:

P (Park), R (Reverse), N (Neutral) and D (Drive) controls.

[3] HEATING AND COOLING CONTROLS:

Controls to operate the heating and ventilation controls (Refer to

’Centre Stack Climate Controls’, page 6.2).

[4] INFOTAINMENT CONTROLS:

Press to operate media controls (Refer to ’Multimedia Controls’,

page 8.4), hands-free phone system (Refer to ’Hands-Free

Controls’, page 7.2)and satellite navigation (Refer to ’Navigation

Controls’, page 9.2).

[5] STOP/START FUNCTION:

Press to turn stop/start function on or off (Refer to ’Stop/Start’,

page 5.27).

[6] MASTER LOCK SWITCHES:

Press to lock or unlock the vehicle (Refer to ’Unlocking From

Inside the Vehicle’, page 2.6).

[7] HAZARD WARNING SWITCH:

Press to set the hazard warning lamps to ON or OFF.

[8] PARK ASSIST FUNCTIONS:

Press to activate the park distance control sensors or the vehicle

camera system (Refer to ’Park Assist Systems’, page 5.28).

[9] PASSENGER AIRBAG STATUS (MARKET DEPENDENT):

Indicator to show if the passenger airbag is active or not.

Audible Centre Stack Feedback

To turn the audible feedback for the centre stack ON or OFF,

press and hold anywhere on the volume slider. A tone will be

given to confirm the change.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 5 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

4.6 Controls

Control Dial

Control Dial with Touch Pad

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 6 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Controls 4.7

[1] CONTROL DIAL:

Use to navigate through menus in the infotainment system. Press

down to confirm a selection (referred to as ENTER throughout this

handbook).

[2] TOUCH PAD: (Optional)

Touch sensitive pad which can be used to navigate menus in the

infotainment system. Press down to confirm a selection (referred

to as ENTER throughout this manual). The touch pad can also be

used for handwriting recognition.

[3] FAVOURITE:

Press to view items on your favourites list. Press and hold

to add the current menu item to the favourite list.

[4] QUICK ACCESS MENU: (Touch Pad only)

Press to access the quick access menu.

[5] BACK:

Press to go back a level in the menu.

Touch Pad

(Optional)

Touch Pad ON/OFF

To activate the TOUCH PAD navigate to the Vehicle Settings

menu and open the System Settings menu (Refer to ’System

Settings’, page 10.3). Select Activate Touch Pad to activate the

TOUCH PAD.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 7 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

4.8 Controls

Menu Navigation

The touch pad can be used to mirror the functions of the joystick

to navigate menu systems. For example, where an instruction in

this handbook states to scroll left with the CONTROL DIAL, you

can swipe left on the TOUCH PAD.

To press ENTER press down on the surface of the TOUCH PAD.

Quick Access Menu

To open the Quick Access menu for audio and telephone, use

two fingers and swipe upwards on the TOUCH PAD surface or

press the QUICK ACCESS button.

The Quick Access menu will then show an overview window

either:

•Radio

•Media

• Telephone entry

The window will show the last system used.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 8 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Controls 4.9

Use two fingers and swipe down on the TOUCH PAD surface or

press the QUICK ACCESS button again to close the Quick Access

menu.

Rotary Controls

The touch pad can also be used to operate rotation controls such

as equalizer settings or 3D map rotation. Use two fingers to touch

the TOUCH PAD and rotate either clockwise or counter-

clockwise.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 9 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

4.10 Controls

Image Pan

To pan an image such as the map, press the TOUCH PAD

surface, until the crosshair is shown and swipe in the direction

you which to pan.

Image Zoom

To zoom in and out of an image such as the map, use two fingers

to touch the TOUCH PAD and pinch together to zoom in, or

swipe apart to zoom out.

Handwriting Recognition

Where text needs to be entered, such as writing a text message,

characters can be 'written' using the TOUCH PAD. To begin

handwriting recognition, press ENTER on the TOUCH PAD.

To enter characters, trace the outline on the surface of the

TOUCH PAD. The infotainment system will then recognize the

character, or offer a suggestions if it cannot recognize characters.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 10 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Controls 4.11

Character Suggestion

To select between character suggestion, turn the CONTROL DIAL

and press ENTER on the highlighted option.

Character Delete

To delete a character, swipe to the left on the TOUCH PAD.

Add Space

To add a space character, swipe to the right on the TOUCH PAD.

Read Out handwriting Recognition ON/OFF

The handwriting recognition system can also be set to read

characters out as they are written.

To set Read Out handwriting Recognition to ON or OFF,

navigate to the Vehicle Settings menu and open the System

Settings menu (Refer to ’System Settings’, page 10.3). Select Read

Out handwriting Recognition and select ON or OFF.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 11 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

4.12 Controls

Steering Wheel Controls

[1] ADAPTIVE DAMPING:

Press to cycle adaptive damping modes (Refer to ’Adaptive

Damping’, page 5.15).

[2] START VOICE CONTROL:

Press to start voice control (Refer to ’Voice Control’, page

4.16).

[3] MENU HOME:

Press to open the instrument cluster menu (Refer to

’Instrument Cluster Menu’, page 4.13).

[4] DRIVE MODE:

Press to cycle between drive modes (Refer to ’Drive

Modes’, page 5.10).

[5] MENU SCROLL:

Roll the menu scroll wheel up or down to navigate the instrument

cluster menu. Press the scroll wheel button to select an item in

the menu (referred to in this handbook as OK).

[6] CALL:

Press answer an incoming call (Refer to ’Calls’, page 7.5).

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 12 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Controls 4.13

[7] MENU BACK:

Press to take the instrument cluster menu back one level.

[8] HORN:

Push to sound the vehicle horn.

[9] END VOICE CONTROL:

End voice control.

[10] END CALL:

Press to end a call or reject an incoming call.

[11] VOLUME DIAL: Roll the volume scroll wheel up or down to

increase or decrease volume for the audio system, or volume

during a phone call. Press the scroll wheel button to set sound to

on or off. Setting sound off will also pause media where

applicable.

Press and hold the scroll wheel button during traffic

announcements to set traffic announcements to off.

Navigation announcements will still be heard if the sound

(audio or call) is set to off. Press and hold the volume scroll button

during a navigation announcement to mute navigation prompts.

Instrument Cluster Menu

The instrument cluster includes an secondary infotainment

system menu. The cluster menu includes settings for the

instrument cluster such as trip computer and units as well as

audio and navigation overview screens.

The instrument cluster menu options are:

•Trip

•Navi

•Radio

•Media

•Telephone

•Service

•Settings

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 13 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

4.14 Controls

Use the button (A) to open the menu home screen. Scroll

through the available options with the menu scroll wheel (B) and

select an item by pressing the scroll wheel button (referred to in

this handbook as the OK button). Press the to go back a

menu level.

Trip

The trip menu will show journey information about the vehicle.

From the trip menu select:

• From Start:

Distance travelled, journey time, average fuel consumptio

and average speed are shown from the ignition was turned

ON.

• From Reset:

Distance travelled, journey time, average fuel consumptio

nd average speed are shown from the trip menu was last

reset.

• Odometer:

Distance since last trip menu reset and total vehicle distance

are shown.

• Range/Consumption:

Range till empty and fuel consumption are shown.

Trip Menu Reset

Press OK when the trip menu shows the From Start, From Reset

or Odometer

to open the Reset window. press OK to confirm

reset.

Trip Menu Reset does not reset the total vehicle mileage.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 14 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Controls 4.15

Navi

Shows the next turn if a route has been set. If no route has been

set, shows direction of travel.

Radio

Shows the selected radio station. Scroll or press OK to open the

radio station list. Use the scroll wheel to select a station and press

OK to confirm.

Media

Shows the selected media track.

Change Track

Press to open the media track list. Use the scroll wheel to select

a track.

Change Media Source

Press OK to open the media sources list. Use the scroll wheel to

select a media source.

Telephone

A mobile device must be paired to the infotainment before this

function can be used (Refer to ’Pairing a Device’, page 7.3).

Shows current network provider. Scroll or press OK to open the

contact list. Press OK or to begin a call.

When a call is in progress, the call status is shown.

Service

The service menu shows information on vehicle. Select from:

• Messages:

Show any stored warning messages.

• Tires Pressure:

Opens the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Menu (Refer to

’Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)’, page 5.24)

• Service Reminder:

Shows how long until the next service is required.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 15 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

4.16 Controls

Settings

The settings menu changes settings related to the instrument

vehicle and driver functions. Select from:

• Assistance:

• ESP

Opens the Electronic Stability Program (ESP) menu to set

to ON, Track or OFF (Refer to ’Electronic Stability Program

(ESP)’, page 5.21).

• Blind Spot Assist

Select to set the Blind Spot Assist to ON or OFF (Refer to

’Blind Spot Monitor’, page 5.12).

• Instrument Cluster:

• Distance Units

Select between Miles or Kilometers

• Consumption Units

Select between MPG or L/100Km

• Factory settings:

Reset all settings back to factory settings.

Voice Control

Commands can be selected in the infotainment system using

voice commands. To begin voice control, press the Voice Control

ON (A) and say a command.

For example:

• Enter Destination will give a list of options to enter a

destination in the navigation system.

• Next Artist will play the next available artist in the media

system if more than one artist is available.

If a command is not available, or the system did not correctly hear

the command, a list of available command will be heard.

To cancel voice control press the Voice Control OFF (B).

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 16 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Controls 4.17

Individualisation

Individualisation is a function that can help refine the Voice

Control system to your own voice. To begin individualisation,

navigate to Vehicle on the main menu and select System Settings

o the lower information bar. Select Voice Control and select

Individualisation. Press ENTER when the pop up window is

shown to begin.

Wiper Controls

Rotate the wipe speed selector (A) to select a wipe speed.

[1] : Windscreen wipers OFF

[2] : Intermittent wipe (low rain sensor sensitivity)

[3] : Intermittent wipe (high rain sensor sensitivity)

[4] : Continuous wipe (slow)

[5] : Continuous wipe (fast)

[6] : Press for single wipe operation. Press and hold further to

operate the front windscreen washers.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 17 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

4.18 Controls

Lighting Controls

Exterior lamps

Master Lamp Switch

Turn the dial to the required light setting or press the fog lamp

button.

[1] : Left side park lamp

[2] : Right side park lamp

[3] : Side lamps (including number plate lamps)

[4] : Dipped beam headlamps

[5] : Automatic headlamp mode

[6] : Rear foglamp

Exterior lamps (except the side lamps/parking lamps) switch off

automatically if you turn the ignition off.

Automatic Headlamp Mode

If ambient light fades, headlamps, side marker, rear and

registration plate lamps will switch ON automatically. If ambient

light then increases, headlamps, side marker, rear and

registration plate lamps will automatically go OFF. Automatic

lamps are market specific.

The automatic headlamp function features an internal timer

that starts when the lamps are turned on. This prevents the lamps

from rapidly changing between on and off if situations where

ambient light can rapidly change, such as driving between

buildings. The headlamps may show a small delay between when

a suitable amount of ambient light is detected, and the lamps

turning off.

Cornering Lamps

The active light function turns the headlamps to match the

steering angle of the front wheels. This will help illuminate the

direction of travel and assist in recognising pedestrians, cyclists

and animals earlier.

The rear fog lamp will only operate with the headlamps set dipped

beam (4) or automatic (5).

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 18 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Controls 4.19

Stalk Controls

Main Beam

Push the stalk away to turn on main beam headlamps. Pull the

stalk back to the initial position to return to dipped beam

headlamps.

Flash Headlamps

Pull the stalk to flash the main beam headlamps.

Direction Indicators

To briefly indicate, press up to indicate a right turn and down for

a left turn. Returns to the centre position on completion of a

manoeuvre. Press until the switch latches to hold the selected

indicator on.

Hazard lamps

The hazard warning lamps will continue to operate if the

ignition is switched off.

To turn on the hazard warning lamps, press the hazard warning

lamp button (A). All direction indicator signals will flash. Press the

button again to turn the hazard warning lamps off.

if you operate a direction indicator from the indicator stalk, only

the selected direction indicators will operate. Once cancelled,

the hazard warning lamps will resume operation.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 19 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

4.20 Controls

Interior Lamps

Instrument Illumination

During the daylight hours the level of instrument brightness

defaults to maximum brightness. During the twilight and night

time hours, a twilight sensor located at the top of the windscreen

automatically reduces the level of brightness to a preset level.

If the twilight sensor is covered then the level of brightness

will stay low as if in night time mode. For example, when parked

in a garage.

The level of brightness can be reduced by using the illumination

dial (A). Push the illumination dial in and release to eject the dial.

Once a level of brightness has been set, push the dial back in.

Reading Lamps

Two reading lamps are located in the front header trim. To

operate the lamps (ON or OFF) touch the reading lamp bezel (A).

Unless set to OFF or ON they will continue to operate up to six

minutes after the ignition is set to OFF.

An additional rear reading lamp can be found in the centre of the

rear header.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 20 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Driving

Driving Techniques .......................................................5.2

How To Start The Engine...............................................5.4

Transmission Controls....................................................5.5

Cruise Control...............................................................5.8

Drive Modes ...............................................................5.10

Blind Spot Monitor......................................................5.12

Adaptive Damping ......................................................5.15

Brakes.........................................................................5.17

Electronic Stability Program (ESP).................................5.21

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)......................5.24

Eco Driving Features....................................................5.26

Park Assist Systems ......................................................5.28

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 1 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

5.2 Driving

Driving Techniques

Procedures for driving this vehicle may be unfamiliar to many

new owners. To make sure that you have a safe and enjoyable

entry into this new phase of Aston Martin motoring, please take

time to safely acquire the necessary new driving skills. Practice in

safe, lower speed conditions before investigating the high

performance potential of the vehicle.

Driving behaviour, such as avoiding aggressive driving, travelling

at lower speeds, correctly inflating tires, reducing periods of idling

and not carrying excessive weight, will improve fuel consumption

and reduce CO2 emissions.

Performance Driving Courses

Performance driving courses are available to enable you to fully

understand the control functions of your vehicle and also the

basic principles of performance driving. Contact your Aston

Martin Dealer for further information.

Running-In

This vehicle is fully hot tested during manufacture and no special

running-in procedures are necessary. Nevertheless it is

recommended to limit engine loads (e.g. by accelerating gently

and by using lower gears on steep hills or when negotiating tight

turns) during the first 1500 km/900miles.

Track Days

Before using this vehicle on track days contact your Aston Martin

Dealer for vehicle set up, service parts and recommendations.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 2 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Driving 5.3

Wet Conditions

When driving in wet conditions, water can build up under your

tires so that they ride on a layer of water. This is called

aquaplaning or hydroplaning. When this happens, you have little

or no control. Aquaplaning is more prone to happening at higher

road speeds if there is a lot of water on the road and particularly

if the tires are also under inflated or approaching minimum tread

depth.

It is important to take bends or curves at a safe, reasonable speed,

particularly when driving on wet or slippery road surfaces.

Slow down when it is raining.

Driving Through Deep Water

If in any doubt whether to drive through deep water, always take

the side of caution to avoid potentially costly damage to the

vehicle's engine or other essential systems.

Caution: Never drive in water deeper than the lower edge

of the front bumper. Water can be splashed up into the

engine air intakes located in the front upper grille and cause

extensive damage to the engine or the vehicle may stall.

Always proceed with extreme caution, especially when the

depth is not known.

When driving through water, traction or brake capability may be

limited. Once through the water, always dry the brakes by driving

slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal.

Waves caused by other vehicles or natural causes can also

splash water in the engine air intakes.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 3 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

5.4 Driving

How To Start The Engine

Warning: The engine can be started by any person in the

vehicle if the brake pedal is pressed down. Care should be

taken that the vehicle is not left unattended with the key

present and occupants such as young children inside.

Caution: In extreme low temperatures (-20°C and below)

do not run the engine above 4000 rpm, while at standstill or

when moving off, until the coolant temperature gauge

reaches normal operating temperature. Revving the engine

before fully warmed up may cause severe engine and

transaxle damage.

Caution: Make sure the park brake is applied and the

transmission is in PARK (P).

To start the engine, fully press the brake pedal down and press

START/STOP (A). The button bezel will flash red once and the

steering lock will release.

Once the begins to crank, release START/STOP.

Starting From Cold

The engine management system automatically compensates for

cold or warm start conditions and makes appropriate adjustments

to the fuel and air mixture and ignition timing.

Stopping The Engine

Press START/STOP to stop the engine.

Quiet Start

Push and hold START/STOP for 3 seconds to use the Quiet Start

feature. The button bezel will flash red twice to confirm. In Quiet

Start, the volume of the exhaust note is reduced on engine start.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 4 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Driving 5.5

Transmission Controls

The automatic transmission has two main driver modes.

Automatic Mode

In Automatic mode, gearshifts are made using the Park, Reverse,

Neutral and Drive (PRND) buttons mounted on the centre stack.

While driving forward, gearshifts are made automatically

according to various driving parameters, i.e. road speed, current

selected gear and accelerator demands. When the vehicle is

stationary, the transmission will select first gear, ready to move off

immediately when the accelerator is pressed.

While in Automatic mode, move to Touchtronic mode at any

time by pulling back on either the upshift or downshift paddles,

mounted behind the steering wheel. As a paddle is pulled back a

gearshift will occur, which will be an upshift or downshift

according to which paddle is pulled.

Kick-Down

In Automatic mode, kick-down is used in circumstances where

rapid acceleration is required, i.e. when overtaking. Kick-down

operates when the accelerator pedal is quickly and fully

depressed, causing the transmission to change down to the

lowest gear possible to achieve maximum acceleration. The gear

engaged depends on the road speed at the time of kick-down.

Touchtronic Mode

In Touchtronic mode, forward gears and Neutral are selected by

using the paddles located behind the steering wheel. Reverse and

Park are selected by using the PRND buttons.

While in Touchtronic mode, move to Automatic mode at any

time by pressing the D (Drive) button, or by pulling and holding

the upshift (+) paddle until Drive is selected.

Select Neutral by pulling on both the upshift and downshift

paddles at the same time.

Neutral can also be selected by pressing the N (Neutral)

button.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 5 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

5.6 Driving

PRND Buttons

[1] P (PARK): Press and release to select Park once the vehicle is

stationary. The transmission will mechanically lock.

Caution: Always make sure that the park brake is ON. This

will help to make sure the vehicle will not roll.

It is not possible to select Park above 2 km/h.

[2] R (REVERSE): When stationary and with the footbrake

applied, press and release to select Reverse. When reverse is

selected, the infotainment screen will change to show the reverse

camera display.

[3] N (NEUTRAL): Press and release to select Neutral.

Caution: Do not change from Park or Neutral into Drive

or Reverse at high engine speed. Doing so can damage the

transmission or the engine.

[4] D (DRIVE): When stationary and with the footbrake applied,

press and release to select forward gears.

Vehicle Rocking Motion

If the vehicle speed is less than 4 km/h, reverse may be selected

from drive, without pressing the brake pedal, to create a vehicle

‘rocking’ motion i.e. to enable vehicle movement out of mud,

snow, etc. If 4 km/h is exceeded then the transmission will

automatically select Neutral.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 6 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Driving 5.7

Touchtronic Controls

Forward gearshifts are selected by pulling back and releasing the

gearshift paddles mounted on the steering column. Neutral is

selected by pulling back both paddles together and releasing.

P (Park) and R (Reverse) are selected by using the centre stack

mounted PRND buttons.

[1] : Downshift Paddle

[2] : Upshift Paddle

Neutral can also be selected by pressing (N) Neutral on the

centre stack.

Pull back on either the upshift (+) or downshift (-) paddle to enter

Touchtronic mode. As the vehicle speed increases and decreases,

make upshifts and downshifts by pulling and releasing the upshift

or downshift paddle.

If no gearshift has been requested by pulling back on a paddle,

upshifts and downshifts will occur automatically (Drive mode

dependant

) if the engine speed rises or lowers to its maximum

or minimum operating limits.

If driving in a high gear, pull and hold the downshift paddle to

select the lowest available gear. For example, if in sixth gear then

second gear is selected.

When stationary, select Neutral by pulling back on both paddles

at the same time. When selecting Neutral from Park, the brake

pedal must be depressed.

When in touchtronic mode, pull back on the upshift paddle for

more than two seconds to move to auto drive mode.

The centre message centre shows the actual gear currently

selected R, D1, D2, etc and the target gear when a gearshift is in

progress (either 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, R or P).

Gear Shift Indicator

The centre message window shows the current gear selected with

an up arrow to indicate when a gear change should take place to

obtain better fuel economy. For example, when in third gear and

a higher gear needs selecting 3 ^ is shown in the centre message

window.

GT Mode: All Gears.

Sport and Sport+: 1st to 2nd gear.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 7 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

5.8 Driving

Cruise Control

Warning: Only use cruise control if road and traffic

conditions are appropriate for maintaining a steady speed

for a prolonged period.

Warning: Cruise control is an aid and cannot take into

account road, weather or traffic conditions. You are

responsible for vehicle speed, braking in good time,

controlling the distance to any vehicle(s) in front and for

staying in the correct lane.

The cruise control system should not be used when:

• road and traffic conditions do not allow you to maintain a

constant speed, e.g. in heavy traffic or on winding roads

• driving on smooth or slippery roads. Braking or accelerating

can cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle

could then skid

• visibility is poor, such as fog, heavy rain or snow

Operation

Cruise control can be used to maintain a selected vehicle speed

without having to use the accelerator.

Cruise control only operates at speeds above 18mph.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 8 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Driving 5.9

Setting A Speed

Lightly push the cruise control lever up to increase speed, or

down to decrease speed in 1 mph increments. A hard press in

either direction will increase in 5 mph increments. Pushing the

cruise control lever in either direction will set a new vehicle

speed in the cruise control system.

The tachometer in the instrument cluster changes to vehicle

speed when cruise control is active

Cruise control will automatically disengage when the brake

pedal is pressed or when the vehicle speed falls below 18 mph.

Resuming the Set Speed

Warning: Set speed should only be resumed if the driver is

aware of the set speed and intends to return to it.

Cruise control will not resume at speeds below 18 mph.

Pull the cruise lever towards you to resume the set cruise control

speed.

If the vehicle is accelerated above the set speed, then the set

cruise speed will be resumed when the accelerator pedal is

released.

If the cruise control is deactivated, or the brake pedal is pressed,

cruise control will disengage but the set speed memory will be

kept. Pull the cruise control lever again and the vehicle will return

to the set speed.

Deactivating Cruise Control

Push the cruise control lever away from you to deactivate cruise

control.

The cruise control set speeds will also be cleared when the

ignition is set to OFF.

Cruise control will automatically deactivate when:

• The brake pedal is pressed

• the park brake is applied

• vehicle speed drops below 18 mph

• Neutral, Park or Reverse gear positions are selected

• the Traction Control System is activated

• a fault occurs in the cruise control system. The cruise contro

system will not operate until the fault is cleared.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 9 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

5.10 Driving

Drive Modes

Vehicle driving characteristics, such as gear changes and throttle

response, can be changed by selecting different drive modes.

Three drive modes are available. Press the S button (A) to cycle

between:

•GT

•Sport

•Sport+

The selected mode will be shown in the right instrument cluster

window (B).

Drive modes operate independently of Electronic Stability

Program (ESP) and Adaptive Damping System (ADS) modes.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 10 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Driving 5.11

GT Mode

GT mode provides a default comfort setting, best suited

to casual and motorway driving.

The transmission is set to use a base transmission

calibration when in Drive to suit a touring style of driving. In

Touchtronic mode, gear shifts take place automatically if engine

speed exceeds 6800rpm.

Cylinder Deactivation

(Refer to ’Cylinder Deactivation’, page

5.26)and Stop/Start(Refer to ’Stop/Start’, page 5.27)functions are

available to improve fuel economy.

Sport Mode

Sport mode uses a more aggressive transmission

calibration, but still with a level of comfort when

changing gear.

The transmission now uses a more aggressive calibration when in

Drive, yet still comfortable enough to be used for general driving.

In Touchtronic mode, the transmission will only automatically

make a change from 1

into 2

gear. Throttle response is also

increased with a more sporting throttle pedal calibration.

The exhaust bypass valves operate at lower engine speed to give

a sense of increase driver involvement.

Cylinder Deactivation

is disabled in Sport mode, but engine

Stop/Start is still available to use.

The Stop/Start(Refer to ’Stop/Start’, page 5.27)function is

available to improve fuel economy.

V12 Engine Only

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 11 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

5.12 Driving

Sport+ Mode

Sport+ mode further increases transmission and engine

response.

The transmission is now set to use an even more

aggressive calibration than used in Sport, with the exhaust bypass

valves also revised to open at lower engine loads and speed.

Gearshifts are not done automatically from 2nd gear onwards in

Touchtronic mode, allowing the driver to hold on to individual

gears.

Both Cylinder Deactivation

and engine Stop/Start functions are

disabled in Sport+ mode

Sport+ mode also adds a transmission temperature gauge (C) to

the left instrument cluster window.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 12 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Blind Spot Assist

Warning: Blind Spot Assist is for visual aid only and does

not replace the need for driver awareness. It is the driver's

responsibility to be aware of their surroundings and make

sure it is safe to complete a lane change. Always make sure

that there is a suitable distance to the side of your vehicle for

other road users and obstacles.

Warning: The Blind Spot Assist system can not react to

vehicles which approach and overtake you at a greatly

different speed. In these situations, the Blind Spot Assist

system cannot provide warning to drivers. Always pay

attention to the road traffic around you.

Blind Spot Assist is used to help a driver know if a vehicle is in

their blind spot so that a lane change action can be safely

completed.

The BSA system uses two rear-facing radar units to monitor the

area up to 3.5m (12 ft) behind your vehicle and 3m (10 ft) directly

next to your vehicle.

If a vehicle is detected at speeds above approximately 30 km/h

(18 mph) and enters the monitoring range directly next to your

vehicle, the warning lamp in the exterior mirror will illuminate

amber. If a vehicle is detected close to your vehicle in the lateral

monitoring range and you switch on the turn signal indicator in

that direction, an acoustic warning signal sounds once. The

amber warning lamp in the outside mirror will flash. If the turn

signal indicator remains on, all other detected vehicles are

indicated only by the flashing of the amber warning lamp. If you

overtake a vehicle quickly, no warning is given.

Driving 5.13

Blind Spot Warnings

Stage One Warning

When the BSA system detects a vehicle in the driver's blind

spot area, an amber LED triangle (A) will be shown in the top

outer corner of the door mirror.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 13 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Operation Conditions

For the Blind Spot Assist system to operate the below conditions

must be met:

• Transmission must be in D (Drive)

• The vehicle must be travelling at speeds of more

than

30 km/h (18 mph)

• Vehicles in the blind spot area must be travelling at speeds of:

• more than 5 km/h (3 mph)

• between 5 km/h (3 mph) slower and 35 km/h (22 mp

faster that your vehicle.

• The minimum width for a vehicle to be detected is 0.7m wide

(a motorcycle for example)

System Limitations

The BSA system can be limited in it's operation in the below

situations:

• The sensors are dirty or obstructed such as snow or mud

the bumpers.

• Poor visibility weather conditions (snow, fog, heavy rain etc).

• Warnings may be incorrectly displayed near to crash barriers

or long solid barriers.

• Warnings can be interrupted when driving alongside long

vehicles such as vehicles with long trailers.

System activation

The BSA system can be activated or deactivated in the instrument

cluster menu (Refer to ’Instrument Cluster Menu’, page 4.13).

5.14 Driving

Stage Two Warning

The BSA will be set to stage two if:

• a vehicle is detected in the blind spot area

• the indicator is used to signal movement into that lane

When this happens, the below actions will take place.

• The amber triangle in the door mirror will flash

• An audible warning chime will sound

• A warning symbol will show in the instrument cluster (changes

for direction of lane change)

Fault Conditions

In the unlikely event of a fault in the BSA system, the warning

triangle in the door mirrors will be continuously lit. Contact your

Aston Martin Dealer. A warning message will also show in the

instrument cluster.

FCC - Radio Frequency Devices

USA

FCC Warning: Changes not expressly approved by the

party responsible for compliance could void the user’s

authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is

subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not

cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any

interference received, including interference that may cause

undesired operation.

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the

limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC

Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection

against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in

a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and

can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used

in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful

interference to radio communications. Operation of this

equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful

interference in which case the user will be required to correct the

interference at his own expense.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 14 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Driving 5.15

Canada

This device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS

standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) this device must not cause interference, and (2) this device

must accept any interference, including interference that may

cause undesired operation of the device.

Radiofrequency radiation exposure Information: This equipment

complies with FCC and IC radiation exposure limits set forth for

an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be

installed and operated with minimum distance of 20 cm between

the radiator and your body. This transmitter must not be co-

located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or

transmitter.

Adaptive Damping

The Adaptive Damping System (ADS) uses sensors to

continuously monitor vehicle body movement and driver inputs,

such as steering, braking and throttle input. The system then

adjusts the suspension damping characteristics to suit the

conditions.

Three adaptive damping modes are available. Press the

DAMPING button (A) to cycle between:

• GT (Default setting)

•Sport

•Sport+

ADS will be set to GT mode at each ignition on.

ADS modes operate independently of Electronic Stability

Program (ESP) and drive modes.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 15 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

5.16 Driving

The selected adaptive damping mode is shown in the left

instrument cluster window (B). The ADS mode will also be briefly

shown in the right instrument cluster window when the ignition

is set to ON or when the ADS mode is changed.

GT mode provides a default comfort setting for the

suspension, suitable for everyday use.

Sport

Sport mode changes the damping characteristics with

increased body control and a firmer ride. Steering weight

is also increased to enhance steering response and

feedback.

Sport+

Sport+ mode further increase the stiffness of the

damping, more suitable for track focused driving.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 16 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Driving 5.17

Brakes

Footbrake

The footbrake uses a vacuum boosted, dual (diagonal split) circuit

hydraulic system with Anti-lock Brake System (ABS).

Warning: In the event of a brake failure, bring the vehicle

to a stop as soon as it is safe to do so. Do not continue to

drive the vehicle. To do so could result in an accident or

collision resulting in death or serious injury.

If vacuum boost or a brake circuit fails, the footbrake will

still operate, but with greater pedal pressure, increased pedal

travel and longer stopping distances. Contact your Aston

Martin Dealer.

Warning: Greater care may be necessary after a long drive

over salted or gritted roads or if driving in heavy rain,

through water or a vehicle wash. Brake action may be

delayed and increased braking pressure may be required.

(V12 Engine Only)

Vacuum boost is only available with ignition at position II or while

the engine is running.

The high performance brake system used on this vehicle is

designed to provide optimal braking under all operating

conditions. However, an inherent characteristic of this braking

system is some brake noise. Certain combinations of speed,

braking forces and ambient conditions may also cause the brakes

to squeal.

Brake Throttle Override

If the throttle and brake pedals are both pressed at the same time

for over 3 seconds, the engine will restrict available torque.

Normal functionality will return when the throttle pedal is

pressed without the brake pedal.

Brake Warnings

Warning: If either brake warning symbol comes ON, you

should immediately be prepared for increased stopping

distances or partial failure of the braking system.

If the brake warning symbol comes ON while driving, the

brake system has a fault and braking performance may be

affected.

If the brake warning symbol comes ON while driving:

• The brake booster system has a fault and braking performance

may be affected.

• The brake fluid level is insufficient.

A message will also show in the right instrument cluster

window with further information.

Stop as soon as possible in a safe and convenient place. Apply the

footbrake and make sure that the park brake is fully released. If

the warning symbol stays ON, do not drive the vehicle. It is

essential that the brake system is checked immediately. Contact

the nearest Aston Martin Dealer.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 17 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

5.18 Driving

ABS Warnings

Warning: If the ABS warning symbol comes ON, you

should be aware that wheels could lock during extreme

braking or when braking on slippery surfaces.

ABS is monitored for correct operation while the ignition is ON.

If a fault is detected, the will come ON and the ABS will be

either partly or fully OFF. Normal braking will continue to

function without ABS.

In the event of an ABS fault, have the braking and ABS systems

checked immediately by an Aston Martin Dealer.

ABS and Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Warnings

Warning: If the ABS and ESP warning symbols come ON,

you should be aware that wheels could lock during extreme

braking or when braking on slippery surfaces. Steering

performance can also function differently and there is

increased risk of skidding and/or accident.

If , and come ON while driving both ABS and

ESP have a fault. The brake system will continue to operate, but

without assistance from either ABS or ESP. Both front and rear

wheels may lock under heavy braking which can result in longer

braking distances in an emergency stop.

A message will also show in the right instrument cluster

window with further information.

Drive on carefully and have the braking and ABS systems

checked immediately by an Aston Martin Dealer.

Anti-Lock Braking System

The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) helps prevent the road

wheels from locking and causing the vehicle to skid during

emergency braking. This also assists the driver in maintaining

steering and directional stability.

If the braking force exceeds tire grip in an emergency braking

situation, the ABS operates to prevent the wheels locking. A

pulsating effect is felt through the brake pedal when this happens.

This is a normal effect of the ABS operating.

Two-Stage ABS

The ABS features two levels of calibration that change depending

on Electronic Stability Program (ESP) setting (Refer to ’ESP

Modes’, page 5.22).

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 18 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Driving 5.19

Safety

It is always the driver's responsibility to drive safely with regard to

driving conditions and according to the law. The fact that a

vehicle is equipped with ABS must never let the driver be

tempted into taking risks which could affect his or her safety or

that of other road users.

The addition of ABS cannot overcome the consequences of trying

to stop in too short a distance, cornering at too high a speed, or

aquaplaning (where the tires are prevented from contacting the

road surface by a layer of water).

The driver should always take road conditions into account. A

slippery road surface always requires more braking distance for a

given speed, even with ABS. Stopping distances can increase with

ABS compared to locked wheels on slushy snow, gravel, sand or

certain heavily corrugated or ridged warning sections of road

surfaces.

If any braking system malfunctions, have the braking and ABS

systems checked immediately by your Aston Martin Dealer.

Brake Pad Conditioning

Warning: For track use or high speed driving, new brake

pads must be correctly conditioned. Failure to correctly

condition the pads may result in greatly reduced brake

performance. Contact your Aston Martin Dealer for further

information.

When new brake pads are installed the brake rotors and pads

need to be conditioned. During this time, brake performance will

be reduced.

Avoid excessive braking, such as hard stops from high speed and

steep descents, for the first few hundred miles

after new brake

pads are installed.

distances can vary depending on driving conditions and frequency of

brake use

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 19 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

5.20 Driving

Park Brake

Park Brake Operation

Warning: If the brake system warning symbol is ON or

flashing, do not rely on the park brake to hold the vehicle

stationary. Contact your Aston Martin Dealer.

When the vehicle is stationary, push the park brake switch (A) in

and release. The warning symbol in the instrument cluster

will come ON when the park brake is applied. The stop lamps

will not come ON.

The park brake operates on the rear wheels of the vehicle.

Caution: Secure parking of the vehicle is dependent on

being on a hard and stable surface. The rear wheels must be

on a suitable surface to prevent vehicle movement.

The ignition control must be at position 'I' to release the park

brake. First apply pressure to the foot brake then pull on the park

brake switch and release. The symbol will go off to show the

park brake has been released.

Drive Away Release

Warning: Do not exit the vehicle with the engine

operating and the transmission in D (Drive) or R (Reverse).

Always select P (Park) before exiting the vehicle. If the

transmission is left in D (Drive) or R (Reverse) , the vehicle

can overcome the park brake and start to move.

With the park brake applied, select a forward or reverse gear and

press the throttle pedal. The park brake will release as the vehicle

moves forwards or backwards.

The park brake will not release when moving from stationary if a

vehicle door is open. In this case the park brake must be released

with the park brake switch.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 20 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Driving 5.21

Park Brake Operation While Moving

Warning: Repeated use of the park brake to slow the

vehicle, or driving the vehicle with the park brake applied

can cause serious damage to the brake system.

In an emergency, pull and hold the park brake lever to reduce

speed. The symbol will come ON, a warning sound will be

heard and CAUTION PARK BRAKE APPLIED will be shown in the

right instrument cluster window.

Release the switch to cancel the park brake application.

Park Brake Faults

Low Battery Voltage

If the battery voltage is too low, the park brake cannot be put ON

or OFF. Connect an auxiliary battery if the battery voltage is too

low.

System Faults

If a fault in the system is detected, PARK BRAKE MALFUNCTION

will show in the message centre. Contact your nearest Aston

Martin Dealer.

If the battery has been discharged or disconnected, APPLY FOOT

AND PARK BRAKE will show in the message centre when the

ignition is next ON. Press the foot brake down and pull the park

brake lever up to put the park brake ON, this will reset the park

brake system.

Electronic Stability Program (ESP)

Warning: It is the driver's responsibility to drive safely

according to the law and with due regard to prevailing

conditions.

Warning: Electronic Stability Program (ESP) must never

let the driver be tempted into taking risks which could affect

his or her safety or that of other road users. ESP cannot

overcome consequences of applying too much engine power

for prevailing conditions.

The Electronic Stability Program (ESP) is designed to improve

driving safety when the tires are at the limits of their grip

capabilities. This is done by control of engine torque and

application of the brakes at individual wheels.

Caution: If repair or replacement of the steering or other

surrounding equipment is necessary, always refer to your

Aston Martin Dealer. There is a sensor in the steering system

which detects steering angle. If the centre position of the

steering deviates, the ESP may not operate correctly.

Caution: ESP may not operate correctly when using tire

chains.

Caution: Use tires of the same manufacturer, brand, type,

tread pattern and correct size specified in this handbook

(Refer to ’Summer Tires’, page 12.22)for this vehicle on all

four road wheels. Do not mix new and worn tires on the same

axle.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 21 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

5.22 Driving

ESP Modes

ESP has three modes of operation:

ON:

ESP defaults to ON each time the engine is started. The will

flash in the instrument cluster when in operation. ABS is set to

stage one. Engine torque and application of the brakes at

individual wheels will be controlled by ESP to aid stability.

TRACK MODE:

Warning: Greater driver input will be required to

maintain vehicle stability in TRACK MODE and is intended

for use on a dry track.

Track mode raises the thresholds at which the ESP operates and

allowing greater wheel slip from the Traction Control System

(TCS). Active Yaw Control (AYC) is also modified to allow a higher

level of yaw. ABS is set to stage two. When the ESP is set to track,

the message ESP TRACK will be shown in the left instrument

cluster window.

OFF:

ESP no longer controls engine torque, and both TCS and AYC are

disabled. ABS will remain in stage two. ESP OFF will show in the

left instrument cluster window when the ESP is set to off.

Dynamic Torque Vectoring (DTV)

Dynamic Torque Vectoring (DTV) uses input signals such as

speed, acceleration and steering angle to monitor vehicle

behaviour during cornering. A small amount of brake pressure

will then be applied to the inside rear wheel to reduce

understeer. DTV is always active, but is more responsive when

the ESP is set to either Track or OFF.

Two-Stage Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)

The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) will change its operation

depending on ESP mode.

Stage One

When ESP is set to ON, the ABS is tuned to give a level of vehicle

performance, control and stability under braking that will cover

everyday driving situations and weather (dry, wet, ice and snow).

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 22 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Driving 5.23

Stage Two

When ESP is set to Track or OFF, the ABS is tuned to allow more

experienced drivers to drive closer to the limits of the vehicle's

ability and enjoy its natural balance in a track environment.

When the ESP is set to stage two, the ABS is applied in the

following ways:

• The Electronic Brake-force Distribution (EBD) increase

braking force to the rear of the vehicle. This is done by

allowing a greater level of slip at the rear axle and a quicker

increase in pressure in the rear brakes. Cornering agility will

be enhanced when braking, but the driver will experience

more vibration through the brake pedal,

• The ABS will allow more slip when the tires are at a

higher

working temperature, such as when the vehicle is driven on a

track. The drive

r will have more control over brake

performance before the ABS is activated.

• Braking performance is given greater priority over stability in

areas with different friction surfaces. Increased steering input

is required to maintain the direction of travel, but optimum

vehicle de

celeration is achieved

• The ABS provides a more aggressive pressure increase for

situations where a wheel can become temporarily unloaded

such as in track sections featuring fast, tight corners, strong

cambers or high-speed crests.

Traction Control System (TCS)

The Traction Control System (TCS) is a function of ESP and is used

to prevent excessive wheel spin at standing starts, or during

acceleration. Wheel spin is usually caused by excessive use of the

accelerator pedal, or slippery, loose or bumpy road surfaces.

Warning: It is always the drivers responsibility to drive

safely according to the law and with due regard to prevailing

conditions.

Warning: Traction control cannot overcome the

consequences of applying too much engine power for

conditions, and must never let the driver be tempted into

taking risks which could affect their safety or that of other

road users.

To prevent wheel spin and maintain vehicle stability in such

situations, the traction control system will:

• Brake either of the driven wheels when they start to slip

• Adapt the engine torque to a level corresponding to th

traction available on the road surface.

These symptoms are normal and will clear as wheel spin is

eliminated and normal engine power is restored.

If cruise control is on it will automatically go OFF when ESP is

operating.

If traction control operates when driving on extended icy or

slippery surfaces, reduce engine power as necessary until the ESP

warning symbol goes OFF.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 23 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

5.24 Driving

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with

a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low

tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is

significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire

pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires

as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure.

Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to

overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces

fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's

handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire

maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain

correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the

level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked

monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure

recommended by the vehicle manufacturer (Refer to ’Tire

Pressures’, page 12.20)on the vehicle placard or tire inflation

pressure label (Refer to ’Vehicle Loading’, page 12.29).

(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated

on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should

determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)

Tire Pressure Display

The TPMS display is shown in the right window of the instrument

cluster. Use the right scroll wheel on the steering wheel to

navigate to Service and select Tire Pressure.

Tire pressures will be displayed in the instrument cluster after

the vehicle has been driven for a few minutes.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 24 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Driving 5.25

Tire Pressure Indicator

If an under-inflated tire is detected by the system, the TPMS

symbol is solidly illuminated.

The message centre will also display one of the below messages:

• Please Rectify Tire Pressures: At least one tire has too low a

pressure. Tire pressures should be checked and corrected

when possible.

• Check Tire(s): At least one tire has significantly low pressure.

he tire pressures must be checked and corrected as soon as

possible.

• Warning Tire Defect: At least one tire has lost pressure very

suddenly. The vehicle should be stopped as safely as possible

and the tires checked.

Once the message has been acknowledged an image of the

vehicle will be displayed in the message centre showing which

tire(s) have low or high air pressure and the current tire pressure.

When the tire pressure indicator comes ON, stop and check your

tires as soon as possible, and inflate or deflate them to the correct

pressure.

Warning: When a tire pressure warning is detected,

reduce the vehicle speed to a safe level. Stop in a safe and

convenient place and inspect the tire(s).

The tire pressures may be displayed in the wrong positions for

a short time if the wheels have been moved on the vehicle. After

a few minutes of driving, the TPMS will calibrate and the tire

pressures are displayed in the correct positions.

TPMS Reset

All warning messages are erased and warning lamps go out

when the TPMS is reset. The TPMS will use the new tire pressure

values as reference values.

To reset the TPMS tire pressure values:

• Use the right scroll wheel on the steering wheel to navigate to

Service.

• Navigate to Tire Pressure

•Select Use Current Pressures as New Reference Values

• The TPMS will now reset. After a short period of driving, th

stem checks if the tire pressures are within the specified

range. The new tire pressures are then used as the new

reference values.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 25 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

5.26 Driving

TPMS Malfunction Warning

The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire

pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the

telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain

continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon

subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may

not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.

TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including

the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the

vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always

check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more

tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or

alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function

properly.

A malfunction of the tire pressure monitor can take up to ten

minutes to be shown. The TPMS warning lamp will go out when

the fault has been resolved and after several minutes of driving.

Eco Driving Features

Cylinder Deactivation

(V12 Engine Only)

Cylinder deactivation is only available when drive mode is set

to GT.

Cylinder deactivation is used to shut off one bank of the engine

when it is under light load. The system will operate at speeds

between 30mph (48 km/h) and 80mph (130 km/h) from 4th gear

and above, so is well suited to motorway driving.

When cylinder deactivation is in operation, the engine switches

which bank is disabled to keep the catalysts at correct operating

temperatures. Both banks will then become active immediately

during acceleration, with no delay in engine performance.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 26 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Driving 5.27

Stop/Start

The Stop/Start function switches the engine off when the vehicle

comes to a stop to reduce fuel consumption and emissions.

Setting ON or OFF

Stop/Start is not available when drive mode is set to Sport+.

Stop/Start is controlled by the START/STOP button (A) on the

centre stack. When the system is active the indicator LED on the

button is ON and the

is shown in the instrument cluster.

Engine Stop Conditions

With Stop/Start active, the engine will switch off when the vehicle

is completely stopped, the transmission is in either D (Drive) or N

(Neutral) and if the following conditions are met:

• the vehicle battery condition is suitable

• the hood is closed

• the driver's door is closed

• the driver's seatbelt is fastened

• the engine is at operating temperate

• the outside temperature is within a suitable range

• the vehicle climate temperature has reached the se

mperature.

• the engine has been on for a minimum of 20 seconds

If any of the above conditions are not met, the Stop/Start ,

otherwise it will be shown in green when the system is

active.

When the engine is switched off, all the remaining vehicle

systems will continue to operate (navigation, media etc).

Symbol may be green or yellow depending on Stop/Start conditions

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 27 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

5.28 Driving

Engine Start Conditions

The engine will automatically start again when:

• the engine has been switched off for 3 minutes

• the engine goes above or below operating temperature

• the throttle pedal is pressed

• the brake pedal is released

• the steering wheel is turned

•the STOP/START button has been pressed on the centre stack

• R (Reverse) is selected

• Sport+ is selected for drive mode (Refer to ’Sport+ Mode’,

page 5.12)

• the driver's seatbelt is unfastened

• the driver's door is opened

• the vehicle begins to roll

• the battery condition would prevent restart

• the vehicle interior has dropped below the temperature set by

the climate control system

Emergency Stops

If the vehicle detects a level of braking that it determines to be an

emergency stop, the stop/start will prevent the engine switching

OFF.

Park Assist Systems

Warning: The park assist systems are for aid only. It is the

driver's responsibility to be aware of their surroundings

when parking or reversing.

Park Distance Control

Caution: It is always the driver’s responsibility to detect

obstacles and estimate the vehicle’s distance from them.

Some overhanging objects, barriers, thin obstructions or

painted surfaces which could possibly cause damage to the

vehicle may not be detected by the system. Always be aware

of your surroundings when using the park assist systems.

Caution: Do not clean the sensors with abrasive or sharp

objects. This can damage the sensors.

For reliable operation, the sensors in the front and rear

bumpers should be kept free from ice, frost and grime. If a high

pressure spray is used to clean the vehicle, the sensors should

only be sprayed briefly and not from a distance of less than 8

Inches.

The Park Distance Control (PDC) system will a sound a series of

warning tones if objects are detected within range of the vehicle.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 28 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Driving 5.29

Activation

PDC will activate at automatically ignition on and when D

(Drive), R (Reverse) or N (Neutral) is selected. The sensors

activated depend on which gear is selected.

Deactivation

PDC will deactivate when the vehicle speed exceeds 11 mph

(18km/h). The system is reactivated automatically when the

vehicle speed is lower.

To manually deactivate PDC press . The indicator LED will

be set to ON to show the system is deactivated.

Operation

Caution: In heavy rain or similar adverse conditions, the

PDC sensors may not always be able to accurately measure

distance to close objects. A fully laden vehicle or irregular

obstacles may also cause inaccurate measurements. Take

extra care in these circumstances.

If an obstacle is detected to the front or rear of the vehicle, a

series of warning tones will be heard from the front or rear

speaker respectively. The frequency of the warning tones

increase as the vehicle approaches the obstacle.

The beep becomes a continuous tone when an obstacle is

detected at or within approximately 12 inches from the rear or

10 inches from the front of the vehicle.

The LED will flash if a fault is detected in the system and a single

three second tone will be heard (only once per ignition cycle).

The system is automatically disabled when a fault is detected.

If an ultrasonic frequency using the same frequency band as

the sensors is detected, the PDC system can give spurious

warning tones.

The PDC system uses inner and outer sensors. When

manoeuvring forward into a garage, the front outer sensors will

cease detection if they detect a stationary or receding object for

three seconds or more. This allows detection directly in front or

behind the vehicle in this type of manoeuvre.

(D) Drive Front sensors only.

(R) Reverse, (N) Neutral Front and rear sensors.

(P) Park Sensors off.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 29 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

5.30 Driving

Active Park Assist

(Optional)

Active Park Assist measures the road on both sides of the vehicle

to locate a parking space the vehicle will fit in. The active park

system will also provide vehicle steering to assist parking in

spaces.

Important Safety Information

Active Park Assist is only an aid. It is the driver's responsibility to

be aware of their surroundings when parking or reversing. Make

sure that no persons, animals or objects are in the vehicle's path.

Active Park Assist is not available if PDC is deactivated or not

functioning.

Warning: While parking, the vehicle can move into areas

of oncoming traffic. This can cause a collision with other

road users. Stop the vehicle or cancel the Active Park Assist

parking procedure if necessary.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 30 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Driving 5.31

Caution: Parking spaces that are partially occupied may be

measured incorrectly. Examples of partially occupied parking

spaces can be trailer draw bars, over grown parking spaces or

incorrect measurement due to heavy rain or snow. Care

should be taken to make sure the space is clear.

Caution: Active Park Assist will not be able to detect

objects above the sensor height range when a parking space

is measured. These object will not be included when the

parking procedure is calculated. Active Park Assist should not

be used around objects such as overhanging loads or tail

sections of goods vehicles.

Active Park Assist can be cancelled at any time by manually

controlling the steering wheel.

Active Park Assist may also display parking spaces that are not

suitable such as prohibited parking zones, driveways or

unsuitable road surfaces.

Active Park Assist should only be used for roads that are

parallel or at right angles to the direction of travel and on the

same road level. The system should not be used for measuring

spaces on bends or on raised footpaths

Parking Space Detection

Active Park Assist operates at speeds of up to approximately

22 mph (35 km/h).

Active Park Assist is activated automatically when driving

forwards and independently locates and measures parking spaces

on both sides of the vehicle.

At speeds below 18 mph (30 km/h), will show in the

instrument cluster. When a parking space has been detected that

the vehicle will fit into, a left or right arrow will show which side

of the vehicle the space is on.

Active Parking Assist will only detect parking spaces:

• that are parallel to the direction of travel and are at least

1.5

m wide and 1.0 m longer than your vehicle.

• that are at right angles to the direction of

travel and at least

1.0 m wider than your vehicle.

Active Park Assist is not able to measure the depth of a

parking space if it is at right angles to the vehicle. You must judge

if your vehicle will fit in the parking space

The system automatically determines if the parking space is

parallel or at right angles to the direction of travel.

A parking space is displayed while you are driving past it, until

you are approximately 15 m away from it

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 31 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

5.32 Driving

Active Park Assist does not assist with parking in right angle space

if:

• two parking spaces are located directly next to each other

• the parking space is directly next to a low obstacle such as a

low kerb

•forward-parking

Active Park Assist will only display parking spaces on the front-

passenger side as standard.

Parking spaces on the driver's side will be displayed if the turn

signal on the driver's side is ON. The indicator must remain ON,

until Active Park Assist is confirmed.

Parking with Active Park Assist

When a parking space has been found and is shown in the

instrument cluster, stop the vehicle and select R (Reverse).

• Start Park Assist? will show in the instrument cluster display

ess OK on the scroll wheel to confirm. To cancel press

or continue to drive away from the space.

• Release the steering wheel and slowly reverse the vehicle,

being ready to brake at all times. Reversing at a speed above 6

mph (10 km/h) will cancel Active Park Assist.

Warning: The vehicle will not automatically brake if an

object is detected.

Additional manoeuvring may be required in tight parking spaces.

If it is necessary for the vehicle to move forward, a message will

show in the right message window. Select D (Drive) while the

vehicle is stationary. Active Parking Assist will then counter-steer

to change the approach angle.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 32 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Driving 5.33

360° Camera System

Caution: The camera system can show a distorted or

incorrect view of obstacles or not at all. Obstacles will not be

shown under, or in very close proximity to, the front or rear

bumpers. Care should also be taken in the blind spots close

to the door mirrors, tailgate or transitional areas between

cameras in the top-down view.

Caution: Objects that are not at ground level can appear

further away than they are. Care should be take when

manoeuvring around items such as tow bars and vehicle

bumpers.

The 360° camera system uses four cameras (front, rear and both

door mirrors) to give a complete view of the vehicle's immediate

surroundings. The system can then be used in a split screen view

to suit different driving scenarios.

Activation

To activate the 360° camera, press the button or select 360°

cameras from the Vehicle Settings menu. The camera will show

the split screen with either the front or rear view, depending on

the transmission selection.

The camera system will be disabled when vehicle speed

exceeds 16 km/h (10 mph). At higher speeds the camera display

will still be selected, but no image will be shown. The system will

display images again when vehicle speed drops below 11 km/h (7

mph).

The ignition must be in at least position 'II' for the cameras to

operate.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 33 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

5.34 Driving

View Selection

To select the different views, push up on the CONTROL DIAL to

the view selection bar. The split-screen views that can be shown

are:

• Top 360° view with rear view

• Top 360° view with top down rear view

• Top 360° view with rear corner view

• Top 360° view with front corner view

• Top 360° view with top down front view

• Top 360° view with front view

180° View

When the camera shows the front or rear view, select 180° view.

This will replace the split-screen view and show a much wider

angle for the front or rear.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 34 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Driving 5.35

Top View with Park Distance Control (Front and Rear views)

To aid with parking the vehicle, a dynamic overlay screen will be

shown over the camera image. The overlay screen adjusts with

steering angle and shows the following information:

1. Distance markers (0.3m, 1.0m and 4.0m)

2. Projected tire path

3. Maximum steering angle

4. Maximum vehicle width guideline (includes door mirrors)

Top View with Corner Views

The corner view cameras show both sides of the vehicle from the

door mirrors. The yellow lines overlaid on the camera view show

the maximum width of the vehicle, including the door mirrors.

Activation by Reverse

The top 360° view with rear view can be set to activate

automatically when R (Reverse) is selected (Refer to ’System

Settings’, page 10.3).

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 35 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

5.36 Driving

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 36 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Climate Control

Climate Controls ...........................................................6.2

Climate Menu ...............................................................6.5

Defrost and Demist .......................................................6.7

Air Distribution Vents ....................................................6.8

Climate Control Operating Tips .....................................6.8

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 1 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

6.2 Climate Control

Climate Controls

Centre Stack Climate Controls

[1] TEMPERATURE:

Press the rocker switch up or down to increase or decrease

the temperature.

[2] AIR DISTRIBUTION:

Press the rocker switch up or down to change airflow

modes.

[3] AIRFLOW SPEED:

Press the rocker switch up or down to increase or decrease

the fan speed.

[4] A/C:

When in manual mode press and release to set the air

conditioning ON or OFF.

[5] AIR CIRCULATION:

Warning: Re-circulated air can cause the interior

glass to mist up in cold or rainy weather. If demisting is

required, use the air conditioning.

Controls the source of air entering the vehicle. Press to select re-

circulated air (button LED ON). Press and hold for more than two

seconds to close the windows.

Press again to select outside air as source (button LED off). Press

and hold for more than two seconds and the windows will open

to their last position

Use the re-circulated air position when going through tunnels,

driving in congested traffic (high engine exhaust areas) or when

maximum cooling is required.

Outside air is used as the default air source and should be used

for normal conditions and demisting.

[6] HEATED REAR WINDOW:

Press to set the rear window and door mirror heaters ON

or OFF. The rear screen heater will automatically set to OFF after

20 minutes and the door mirror heaters set to OFF after 6

minutes.

[7] MENU:

Opens the Climate menu (Refer to ’Climate Menu’, page

6.5).

If windows were open before selecting re-circulated air.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 2 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Climate Control 6.3

[8] DEMIST:

Press for maximum defrost or demist ON or OFF. Outside

air intake is automatically selected and air conditioning is

automatically started.

[9] AUTO:

Press for automatic climate control (Refer to ’Automatic

Climate Control’, page 6.4).

[10] SEAT HEATING/COOLING:

Warning: Do not press the seat heater switch repeatedly.

This can cause the seat to become very hot and can cause

burn injuries to persons with limited sensitivity to

temperature changes.

• Seat Heating (standard):

Press to cycle the seat heating level on the driver or

passenger seats. The LEDs show which heating level is set,

where the higher the number of LEDs illuminated, the

greater the heating level.

• Seat Cooling (optional):

Press to cycle the seat cooling level on the driver

passenger seats. The LEDs show which cooling level is set,

where the higher the number of LEDs illuminated, the

greater the cooling level.

Infotainment Climate Controls

[1] TEMPERATURE:

Open the temperature list.

[2] AIR DISTRIBUTION MODES:

Open the air distribution list.

[3] AIRFLOW:

Open the airflow speed list. Select a fan speed from 1 to 7 or

select AUTO.

[4] CLIMATE MENU:

Shows the Climate Mode setting and Air Conditioning status.

Select to open the Climate Menu (Refer to ’Climate Menu’, page

6.5).

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 3 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

6.4 Climate Control

Automatic Climate Control

The temperature is maintained at a set level in automatic mode.

The climate system will automatically control the temperature,

airflow and the air distribution according to the interior and

exterior conditions.

To set a temperature for automatic operation:

• Set a temperature using the rocker switches.

•Press

• The LED indicator lamp will switch on.

Press and hold will set the climate control to a default

setting of 22°C, low fan speed and vents open.

Maximum fan speed will not be available until the engine has

reach its normal operating temperature.

Any changes to the air distribution or airflow speed will cancel

automatic climate control.

Manual Climate Control

Manually set the temperature, airflow speed and air distribution:

Warning: Re-circulated air can cause the interior glass to

mist up in cold or rainy weather. If demisting is required, use

the air conditioning.

To prevent cold air blowing from the vents, airflow speed is

reduced until the engine warms up.

The climate system will produce the selected temperature

regardless of in-vehicle conditions.

For maximum cooling press for re-circulated air.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 4 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Climate Control 6.5

Climate Menu

Climate Mode

Select one of three modes:

[1] MEDIUM: Standard airflow with medium airflow.

[2] FOCUS: High level of airflow at a cooler temperature setting.

[3] DIFFUSE: Low level of airflow at a warmer temperature

setting.

Temperature

Rotate the CONTROL DIAL to set the temperature.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 5 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

6.6 Climate Control

Air Distribution

Rotate the CONTROL DIAL to choose an air distribution mode.

Airflow

Rotate the CONTROL DIAL to choose an airflow speed from

between 1 and 7 or AUTO.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 6 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Climate Control 6.7

Climate Options

[1] SYNC.:

Select to synchronize the left and right climate zones. Only one

setting dial will be shown when climate conditions are being set.

If SYNC is set to OFF, push the CONTROL DIAL left or right to

select which zone to adjust.

[2] CLIMATE CTRL ON:

Press ENTER to set the climate control to ON or OFF.

[3] A/C:

Press ENTER to set the air conditioning to ON or OFF.

[4] :

Return to the main menu screen.

Defrost and Demist

Caution: To defrost or demist the windscreen on vehicle

start up in extreme cold weather conditions, operate the

engine at 1500 rpm. Always make sure that the transmission

is in P (park) and the park brake is applied.

Press . The outside air intake is automatically selected, the

temperature is set to maximum and air conditioning is started.

If the engine is cold the air conditioner will not start up until

the engine has started to warm up.

To cancel automatic defrost or demist either:

• P

ress again.

•Press .

• Select a different airflow mode.

The automatic defrost setting times out after 6 minutes.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 7 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

6.8 Climate Control

Air Distribution Vents

To adjust the air vents, use the vent knob (A). Push up or down

to adjust the blades inside the vent. Push left or right to adjust the

angle of the vent unit.

Rotate the knob to open or close the vent.

Climate Control Operating Tips

• Moisture which forms on the evaporator in the air

conditioning unit is discharged via a drain tube onto the road.

After stopping, small puddles of water may form underneath

the vehicle. This is normal and does not show a system

malfunction.

• Air conditioning may not function when the outside

temperature approaches 0°C (indicator stays ON even when

system is OFF).

• Windows can fog up easily in humid weather. Use the climate

control system to demist the windows.

• Clear all obstructions like leaves, snow and ice from the hood

and the air inlet in the front grille to improve the system

efficiency.

•Use the ‘outside air’ position in normal conditions. The ‘re-

circulated air’ position should be used temporarily when

driving on dusty roads or for quick cooling or heating of the

interior.

• If the vehicle has been parked in direct sunlight during hot

weather, open the windows to let warm air escape, then close

the windows and operate the climate control system.

• Operate the climate control system at least once a month to

keep internal parts lubricated.

• Have the climate control system checked before the weather

gets hot. If the climate control system is low on refrigerant or

has a malfunction, consult your Aston Martin Dealer.

• Mist may come out from the vents when using the air

conditioning. This is humid air being suddenly cooled and not

a sign of a malfunction.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 8 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Hands-Free Phone

Hands-Free Controls .....................................................7.2

Device Management .....................................................7.2

Phone Features .............................................................7.5

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 1 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

7.2 Hands-Free Phone

Hands-Free Controls

[1] TEL: Press to access phone menus.

[2] CALL : Press to answer a phone call.

[3] END CALL : Press to end a call.

[4] VOLUME/MUTE: Scroll to increase or decrease call

volume. Press to mute.

Device Management

Bluetooth®

technology is a standard for short-range wireless

data transmissions up to approximately 10 metres. Bluetooth can

be used to connect your mobile device to the vehicle

infotainment system. This system can then be used to operate the

hands-free phone system, Bluetooth audio streaming and

internet access.

Bluetooth Activation

The vehicle's Bluetooth® system can be turned ON or OFF.

Before a Bluetooth® device can be used with the vehicle

Bluetooth®, the vehicle's Bluetooth® system must be switched

to ON.

To set the vehicle Bluetooth® system ON:

•Navigate to VEHICLE on the main menu.

•Select System Settings.

•Select Activate Bluetooth and set to ON.

The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks

owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any use of such marks by Aston

Martin is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of

their respective owners.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 2 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Hands-Free Phone 7.3

Pairing a Device

Bluetooth® must be activate on both the vehicle and the

mobile device to be used.

Before a device can be used, it must be paired to the

infotainment system.

To add a new device, select TEL from the main menu and select

Connect Device. Select Search for Phones or Search via

Telephone.

Search for Phones

The mobile device must be set to discoverable mode. Refer to

the mobile device manufacturers instructions.

Select Search for Phones to begin a search for available visible

phones. Any phone's with a tick next to them are devices that

have already been paired with the infotainment system. Scroll

and select the required phone and press ENTER. Follow the

instructions shown on the phone and the infotainment display to

pair the phone.

Search via Telephone

Select Search via Telephone to set the infotainment system to

'listen' for a mobile phone connection. Follow the mobile phone

manufacturer's instructions to search and connect to a new

Bluetooth® device. The phone will search for discoverable

Bluetooth® devices in its range.

Select Aston Martin DB11 from the device list.

If Aston Martin DB11 does not show, check that Bluetooth®

is active in the infotainment system and search again.

Follow the instructions shown on the phone and the infotainment

display to pair the phone.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 3 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

7.4 Hands-Free Phone

Completing Device Pairing

Once the mobile phone is paired it is ready for use with the

vehicle audio and hands-free system. The vehicle will also

request access to call history, contact list and messages.

You can authorize up to 15 mobile phones. After authorisation,

the connection with the two phones that were last used functions

automatically. Only one mobile phone can be connected to the

multimedia system at any one time.

Selecting a Device

When more than one device has been paired, you can choose

which phone to use for an active connection. To choose a device,

select Connect Device. Scroll through the list and select the

device to be used.

Only one device can be used for an active connection at any

one time. The active device is indicated by a dot in the device list.

You cannot change the active device during a call.

Device Details

To show device details, select TEL from the main menu and

navigate to Connect Device. Scroll through the list and select a

device.

Push the CONTROL DIAL right and select Details. The below

information will be shown:

•Bluetooth device name

•Bluetooth address

• Availability Status

• Authorisation status

Deleting a Device

To delete a device, select TEL from the main menu and navigate

to Connect Device. Scroll through the list and select the device

to be deleted.

Push the CONTROL DIAL right and select De-authorize. A

message will show to ask if you really wish to remove this device.

Press ENTER to confirm.

It is recommended that the device Aston Martin DB11 is also

removed from the Bluetooth® connected devices on your mobile

device.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 4 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Hands-Free Phone 7.5

Phone Features

Contact Lists

The contact list displays all available contacts for your phone

contacts which have a phone number.

To access the contact list press on the centre stack or

navigate to Telephone to open the phone menu. Select Name to

show the list of contact names. Phone contacts will be displayed

in alphabetical order.

Call lists

Select Call Lists and choose Incoming Calls, Calls Dialled or

Speed Dial Preset List.

Calls

Make a Call

A call be made in several ways:

• Choose a contact from the Contacts list.

• Enter a number using the on screen number pad.

Press on the steering wheel, or press ENTER on the Send

icon to begin a call.

End a Call

To end a call, press on the steering wheel, or press ENTER

on the End Call icon.

Answer a Call

To answer an incoming call, press , or press ENTER.

Reject a Call

To reject a call, press , or select Reject Call and press ENTER.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 5 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

7.6 Hands-Free Phone

Second Incoming Call

If there is an incoming call during an active call, press to

answer the new call and put the original call on hold.

To reject the call press , or select Reject Call and press

ENTER. Depending on the mobile manufacturer or network

supplier, one of the following actions will occur:

• The incoming call is rejected, and the original call is

continued.

• The incoming call is accepted, and the original call is ended.

• Both calls will be ended.

Microphone ON/OFF

To turn the microphone on or off during a call select Microphone

Off and press ENTER.

Multiple Call Handling

(Network Provider Dependant)

Add a Call

To make a second call during a call, select the 2ND CALL icon

and select a contact. The first call will then be held.

Switch Calls

If there are multiple calls active, they will be marked as 1ST CALL

and 2ND CALL. The active call will be highlighted. To switch

between calls, select the call you wish to make active and press

either ENTER or . Selecting a new active call will put the

inactive call on hold.

To end the active call, select the END CALL icon on the display

and press ENTER or press .

To make the call on hold active, press .

The held call can be activated automatically when the active

call is ended, depending on network supplier or mobile phone.

Conference Call

If there active and held calls, a conference call can be used to

have all calls active at the same time. During an active call, select

Conference on the telephone menu and press ENTER. The held

call participant will then be added to the active call.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 6 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Hands-Free Phone 7.7

Messages

The connected mobile phone must support Message Access

Profile (MAP) to be able to access text and email messages. This

may have to confirmed separately for some devices when paired

to the vehicle.

Select on the lower information bar to open the messages

menu.

The symbol will be shown at the top of the screen when

new messages are received. New messages will be shown in the

centre display.

the lower information bar has the below options:

[1] :

Return to phone menu.

[2] SETTINGS:

Opens the message settings to set automatic message downloads.

• All Messages: Downloads all messages when the phone is

connected

• New Messages: Only show new messages when the

phone is connected

• Off: Do not show messages.

[3] FOLDER:

Open to view text messages:

•Inbox

• Outbox

•Drafts

[4] DOWNLOAD:

Download messages from the phone to view on the infotainment

screen.

[5] NEW MESSAGE:

Open the message entry window.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 7 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

7.8 Hands-Free Phone

Message Entry

Push up with the CONTROL DIAL to select a contact to send a

message to. From the Contact entry bar, push down on with the

CONTROL DIAL to select the message entry window.

[1] TEXT TEMPLATES:

Opens a list of common phrases to be entered into a

message.

[2] RETURN:

Starts a new line of text.

[3] CASE:

Switch between upper and lower case characters

[4] NON-ALPHABETICAL CHARACTERS:

Show numbers and miscellaneous characters

[5] LANGUAGE:

Select to open the languages list. characters sets will then

be set to suit individual languages.

[6] CLEAR:

Select to clear a character. Press and hold ENTER to clear

the whole message.

[7] OK:

Press ENTER to send the message.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 8 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Media Systems

Audio Specification .......................................................8.2

Multimedia Controls......................................................8.4

Radio ............................................................................8.5

Satellite Radio ...............................................................8.6

Media ...........................................................................8.9

Media Menu ...............................................................8.12

Media Register ............................................................8.16

Bluetooth Audio..........................................................8.16

Sound .........................................................................8.17

Wi-Fi Hotspot .............................................................8.18

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 1 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

8.2 Media Systems

Audio Specification

Radio

• Satellite Radio

• AM and FM radio

Audio Inputs

• 2 x USB ports in centre storage tray

• SD Card reader in centre storage tray

• Bluetooth® Wireless technology

• CD/DVD reader in centre stack

Aston Martin Standard Audio

7 Channel 320W Audio System

Speakers

[1] TWEETERS:

Two 1 inch tweeters.

[2] CENTRE SPEAKER:

N/A

[3] FOOTWELL WOOFERS:

Two 6.5 inch 125W woofers in enclosed cabinets.

[4] DOOR SPEAKERS:

4 inch 40W mid-range Speaker in enclosed cabinet in each front

door.

[5] REAR QUARTER SPEAKERS:

4 inch 40W mid-range Speaker with 3/4 inch tweeter in each rear

quarter panel.

[6] SUBWOOFER:

N/A

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 2 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Media Systems 8.3

Aston Martin Premium Audio

10 Channel 640W Audio System

Speakers

[1] TWEETERS:

Two 1 inch tweeters.

[2] CENTRE SPEAKER:

4 inch dual voice coil 40W mid-range speaker with 5W tweeter.

[3] FOOTWELL WOOFERS:

Two 6.5 inch 125W woofers in enclosed cabinets.

[4] DOOR SPEAKERS:

4 inch 40W mid-range Speaker in enclosed cabinet in each front

door.

[5] REAR QUARTER SPEAKERS:

4 inch 40W mid-range Speaker with 3/4 inch tweeter in each rear

quarter panel.

[6] SUBWOOFER:

8 inch dual voice coil 120W+120W subwoofer housed in the

rear environment.

Bang and Olufsen Audio

Power Output

13 Channel 1000W Audio System

Speakers

[1] TWEETERS:

Two 3/4 inch (soft dome) tweeters incorporating Acoustic Lens

Technology (ALT).

[2] CENTRE SPEAKERS:

4 inch dual voice coil mid-range Speaker with 3/4 inch tweeter.

[3] FOOTWELL WOOFERS:

Two 6.5 inch woofers in enclosed cabinets.

[4] DOOR SPEAKERS:

4 inch mid-range Speaker in enclosed cabinet in each front door.

[5] REAR QUARTER SPEAKERS:

4 inch mid-range Speaker with 3/4 inch tweeter in each rear

quarter panel.

[6] SUBWOOFER:

One 8 inch 250W Subwoofer centre mounted in the rear

environment.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 3 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

8.4 Media Systems

Multimedia Controls

[1] DISC SLOT:

Slot to insert a CD or DVD disc.

[2] EJECT:

Press to eject disc.

[3] MEDIA:

Opens the Media screen (Refer to ’Media’, page 8.9).

Opens the media source list if media screen is already open.

[4] VOLUME CONTROLS:

Press to increase and to decrease volume. Sliding a

finger along the volume bar will also increase or decrease

volume.

Volume can also be controlled by the left scroll wheel on the

steering wheel.

[5] RADIO:

Open the Radio screen (Refer to ’Radio’, page 8.5).

Opens the radio source list if media screen is already open.

[6] POWER:

Press to turn the infotainment system ON or OFF.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 4 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Media Systems 8.5

Radio

Press on the centre stack or select Radio from the main

menu to open the Radio screen.

The display area will show the currently selected radio station

and available radio stations.

Press again or select Radio to open the menu of available

radio sources:

•FM Radio

• SiriusXM Radio

•AM Radio

• Radio Presets

Rotate the CONTROL DIAL to select a radio source and press

ENTER.

Radio Stations

Selecting a station from the display screen

The display screen shows available stations that can be played.

Rotate the CONTROL DIAL with the centre display highlighted to

select a radio station

Selecting a station from the current stations list

Press ENTER with the centre display highlighted to open the

current stations list.

Rotate the CONTROL DIAL to select a radio station and press

ENTER.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 5 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

8.6 Media Systems

Satellite Radio

Satellite or radio modes can be temporarily interrupted or

unavailable for a number of reasons such as:

• Tunnels.

• Parking garages.

• Inside or next to buildings.

Sirius XM®

Satellite Radio offers 100% commercial-free digital-

quality radio channels for music, sports, news and entertainment.

Satellite Radio Registration

Before registering your satellite radio subscription you will need

the Sirius XM® ID (ESN number) for your receiver. This can be

found in the Options menu under Service along with a contact

phone number.

To register, call SIRIUS or go online:

North America:

Tel: 1-888-539-7474

http://www.siriusxm.com

Canada:

Tel: 1-888-635-9632

http://www.siriusxm.ca

Registration can take up to 10 minutes. When registration is

complete, the message Updating Channels... will be shown

followed by the satellite radio menu.

Selecting a channel

Channel Browse

The display screen shows available channels that can be played.

Push the CONTROL DIAL with the centre display highlighted to

browse channels.

Channel List Updates

If new channels become available, Updating Channels... is shown

as a message on the display. Whilst updating, the last channel

selected is set to mute until the update is complete and satellite

radio will not be available. When the update is complete, the

satellite radio menu will be shown again. If the last selected

channel is still available, this channel will resume playing.

Satellite Radio Overview

On the lower information bar there will be the following options:

•Options

•Search

•Category

•Preset

•Band

• Information

•Sound

Sirius, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM

Radio Inc. and its subsidiaries. All other marks, channel names and logos

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 6 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Media Systems 8.7

Options

Tag This Track

Select to store the track and music artist currently being played

Stored tracks can then be later purchased in the iTunes® store.

Music and Sports Alerts

An alert can be set for your favorite artists, tracks or sporting

events

Once set, the infotainment system will continuously search

through all channels. When a match to one of yours saved alerts

is found, a window will show with any related information.

To Set A Music Alert

Select Options from the lower information bar and select Alert

for Artist, Track & Sports Event.

Select Add New Alert and select either Artist or Track.

Music alerts can only be saved whilst a track is being played

Music Alert

When a music alert is shown, select Change to to change the

channel and the selected artist or track is played, or select Ignore

and the current channel will continue playing

To Set a Sports Alert

Select Options from the lower information bar and select Alert

for Artist, Track & Sports Event.

Select Manage Sport Alerts followed by Select New Alerts.

Choose a team from a league to set an alert for.

Editing music and sports alerts

Open Alert for Artist, Track & Sports Event to view a list of

available alerts to edit.

Direct Entry

Opens a window to enter the frequency (AM/FM), channel

(SiriusXM) or preset number for a radio station

Current Station List with Artist & Title

Select Options from the lower information bar and select

Current Station List with Artist & Title to open the channel list.

Scroll through the list with the CONTROL DIAL and press ENTER

to select a channel

Apple® devices only

Not supported by all radio channels.

Up to 30 alerts can be stored.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 7 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

8.8 Media Systems

Service

The provider's customer service center is available by phone at

any time to answer any general questions or questions on the

versions available.

To select : turn and press the controller.

To select Service : turn and press the controller. The provider's

details appear.

To return to the main display: press the % button.

Select the search function in the lower information bar to

open the search window. Enter a search term and select a

channel from the list of search results.

Category

Satellite radio channels are sorted into categories such as News/

Discussions, Sports and Country (where available). Categories

sorted alphabetically and category content is sorted by channel

numbers.

Select Category on the lower information bar to view the

category list. Select a category from the list to show all channels

within that category

Presets

The centre display can be set to show stored preset stations

instead of available stations.

To set preset view ON or OFF, select Presets from the lower

information bar and select Station Preset View. Press ENTER to

set ON or OFF.

Saved Preset Channels

Quick save:

Select the channel you wish to save. Press and hold ENTER until

the preset list appears.

Rotate the CONTROL DIAL to select a preset number to save the

channel to. A tone will confirm that the channel was successfully

saved.

Saving a channel using the edit function:

Select Preset from the lower information bar and select Edit

Station Preset. The list of saved channels will then be shown.

Press and hold ENTER on a selected preset number to save the

current channel. This will overwrite any previously saved channel

in the preset number slot.

There are 100 preset slots available.

Band

Select between SiriusXM®, HD Radio FM and HD Radio AM.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 8 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Media Systems 8.9

Information

Select whether to show the available channels list or information

about the current channel.

Information will be available such as:

• Channel logo

• Channel abbreviation

• Current track

• Current track artist

Sound settings

Opens the Sound menu screen (Refer to ’Sound’, page 8.17)

Media

Press on the centre stack or select Media from the main

menu to open the media Now Playing screen.

Now Playing screen layout will depend on the media device

last used.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 9 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

8.10 Media Systems

Now Playing

Media

The Now Playing screen shows track information such as album

art, artist and album name on the left side of the screen along

with track play time and track number. Media source device and

track name are shown on the right side of the screen.

Video files can also be supported with the infotainment system.

To select full screen display, highlight the view window area and

press ENTER.

DVD Video Media

The Now Playing screen initially shows video in full screen mode.

Press ENTER to bring up the basic DVD information bar which

shows media source, track/title number, scene number and play

time. Press ENTER on Menu to show the upper and lower

information bars. Media playback will continue.

To return to full screen display, push up or down on the

CONTROL DIAL to highlight the display area and press ENTER on

the full screen symbol .

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 10 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Media Systems 8.11

Media Sources

Press MEDIA or select Media from the main menu with to show

the available media sources. Rotate the CONTROL DIAL and

press ENTER to select a media source.

Select from the following media sources:

•Disc

•Memory Card

• Media Register

•USB 1

•USB 2

• Bluetooth Audio

Alternatively, select a media source from Devices(Refer to

’Devices’, page 8.15).

Media File Systems and Formats

File Systems

CD:

•CD-R

•CD-A

•CD-RW

DVD:

•DVD-R

•DVD-V

•DVD-RW

USB and SD Memory Card:

•FAT16

•FAT32

•exFAT

•NTFS

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 11 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

8.12 Media Systems

Media Formats

Audio

•MP3

•WMA

•CD-A

•AAC formats

•.aac

•.mp4

•.m4a

•.m4b

It is recommended to use tracks of at least 128 kbit/s bit rate

and a sampling rate of at least 44 kHz. Lower rates may cause a

noticeable loss of sound quality.

Video

•DVD-V

•MPEG

•WMV

•M4V

•AVI

Media Menu

On the lower bar of the Media screen there will be there will be

several options:

•Options

• Play/Pause

•Search

• Devices

•Sound

Fixed and variable bit-rates between 32 kbit/s to 320 kbits/s. Sampling

rates between 8 kHz and 48 kHz

Fixed bit-rates between 5 kbit/s to 384 kbits/s. Sampling rates between

8 kHz and 48 kHz

DRM encrypted files, variable bit rate, WMA Pro and 5.1 Surround

files are not supported.

Copy-protected iTunes® music files with the .m4p file extension are

not supported.

Up to 720p.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 12 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Media Systems 8.13

Options

Media Options

• Play similar tracks

• Play mode

• Direct track entry

•Skip to time

• Select active partition

• Save files to Media Register

• Manage Media Register

• Show track information

DVD Video Options

• Skip to time

• Direct track entry

•DVD functions

• Video settings

• Show track information

•TA

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 13 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

8.14 Media Systems

Play Similar Tracks

Play tracks that are of the same genre.

Play Mode

Select from Normal Track Sequence, Random Track List or

Random Media.

Direct Track Entry

Manually enter track name.

Skip to Time

Rotate the CONTROL DIAL to select a set time in the track. Press

ENTER to play.

Select Active Partition

(USB devices only)

Select which partition to use if more than one partition is

available.

Save Files to Media Register

Save the current file or files to vehicles internal hard drive.

Manage Media Register

Opens the Media Register options menu. (Refer to ’Media

Video Settings

Opens video settings menu

Show Track Information

Set whether artist and track information is shown in the display

screen.

DVD functions

Opens the DVD function menu.

• Return to full screen display.

• Return to the basic DVD information bar.

• Stop playback.

• Pause playback.

• Subtitles.

• Change

aspect ratio.

• Return to start of scene or chapter.

Up to 9 partitions can be supported.

Only available if a device contains video files.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 14 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Media Systems 8.15

Search for a media file from a list of the below information fields:

• Current tracklist

•Folder

• Select by cover

•Keyword Search

•Artists

•Albums

•Tracks

•Genres

•Year

•Composers

•Videos

• Photos

Devices

Opens a list of available media devices.

Sound

Opens the Sound menu screen (Refer to ’Sound’, page 8.17).

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 15 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

8.16 Media Systems

Media Register

The media register can be used to store music, picture and video

files directly on the vehicle's hard drive.

Storage capacity for the media register is approximately 10.8

GB, enough to store approximately 10000 minutes of music,

4700 pictures or 1300 minutes of video

Media Register Options

Select the Manage Media Register option in the Options menu.

Choose from the following options:

• Rename/Delete Files

•Edit

• Delete

• Delete All Media Files

•Memory Info

Bluetooth Audio

Bluetooth Connection

Bluetooth® audio must be paired to the vehicle

independently from the Bluetooth® hands free connection.

To select a Bluetooth® audio device:

1. Make sure Bluetooth® is activated on your device

and in

discoverable mode

2. Select Bluetooth Audio as a media source.

3. In the Options menu, select Bluetooth Audio Devices.

4. Select a Bluetooth® device from the list of devices.

(Previously paired devices will be shown with a tick symbol.)

For new devices:

5. Select the device from the list to begin pairing.

6. A code will be shown on the infotainment display. If this

code matches the code shown on the Bluetooth® device

select Yes to complete pairing.

Select No to cancel pairing the Bluetooth® device.

Values will depend on sound or picture quality.

Refer to device manufacturers instructions.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 16 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Media Systems 8.17

Options

• Bluetooth Audio Devices

• Play mode

• Volume

Bluetooth Audio Devices

Opens menu to manage Bluetooth® devices.

Play Mode

Select from Normal Track Sequence, Random Track List or

Random Media.

Volume

Adjust volume of the vehicle speakers. Volume can also be

controlled on the Bluetooth® device. To maintain a volume level

similar to other media sources, adjust the volume on the

Bluetooth® device before adjusting volume for the vehicle

system.

Sound

The Sound menu screen can be accessed from either the Radio

or Media screens.

•Equaliser

•Balance/Fader

• Surround

•Sound Focus

Equaliser

Adjust the Treble, Mid-tones and Bass frequencies between -10

and 10

Balance Fader

Adjust the Balance (left to right) and Fader (front to rear) sound

distribution between -10 and 10 (0 is equal distribution).

Surround (Bang & Olufsen only)

Adjust level for surround sound from -10 to 10

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 17 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

8.18 Media Systems

Sound Field/Sound Focus

(Audio Level Dependent)

Changes the optimisation of the speakers depending on if how

many occupants are in the vehicle. Select from:

•Auto:

Automatically adjusts the speaker focus for the number of

occupants in the vehicle.

The media system detects occupants from which seat belts

are engaged.

• Driver:

The sound is optimized for the driver only.

•Front:

The sound is optimized for both the driver and front seat

passenger.

Wi-Fi Hotspot

Your vehicle can be used as a Wi-Fi hotspot hub to provide

internet access to other Wi-Fi enabled devices such as a mobile

phone or tablet.

Wi-Fi must be activated on both the internet device and the

infotainment system.

To create a Wi-Fi connection, an Internet-enabled mobile device

must be paired to the vehicle (Refer to ’Pairing a Device’, page

7.3). Navigate through the device settings to set a mobile hotspot.

The exact Wi-Fi connection procedure will be device

dependant. Follow the manufacturer's operating instructions.

To activate Wi-Fi on the vehicle:

•Navigate to VEHICLE on the main menu.

•Select System Settings.

•Select Wi-Fi, then Activate and set to ON.

To Connect A Device

•Navigate to VEHICLE on the main menu.

•Select System Settings.

•Select Wi-Fi.

You will have three available connection options:

• Connect via WPS PIN

• Connect via WPS PBC

• Connect Using Security Key

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 18 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Media Systems 8.19

Connect via WPS PIN

For this type of connection, the device to be connected must

support "Connect using WPS PIN".

Select the vehicle from the device to be connected and "Connect

using WPS PIN". The vehicle SSID will be displayed as AML

WLAN XXXXX.

The mobile device will generates a PIN. Enter this PIN into the

infotainment system.

Connect via WPS PBC (Push Button)

Select the vehicle from the device to be connected and "Connect

via WPS PBC". The vehicle SSID will be displayed as AML WLAN

XXXXX.

Select Continue in the infotainment system.

Connect using security key

Select the vehicle from the device to be connected. The vehicle

SSID will be displayed as AML WLAN XXXXX.

Enter the security key shown in the infotainment system into the

device to be connected.

Generate security key

Select to generate a security key. To save the security key, rotate

the CONTROL DIAL and select Save.

The new security key will now be displayed and verified when a

Wi-Fi connection is established.

The connection must be re-established with the newly

created security key.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 19 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

8.20 Media Systems

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 20 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Satellite Navigation

Safety Information.........................................................9.2

Navigation Controls.......................................................9.2

Navigation Menu...........................................................9.3

Options.........................................................................9.3

Traffic ...........................................................................9.6

Route............................................................................9.7

Position.........................................................................9.8

Destination ...................................................................9.9

Navigation Menu.........................................................9.13

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 1 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

9.2 Satellite Navigation

Safety Information

Warning: Failure to avoid the following potentially

hazardous situations could result in an accident or collision

resulting in death or serious injury.

Warning: Always use your best judgement, and operate

the vehicle in a safe manner. Do not become distracted by

the navigation system while driving, and always be fully

aware of all driving conditions. Minimise the amount of time

spent viewing the screen while driving and use voice

prompts when possible.

Warning: Do not input destinations, change settings, or

access any functions requiring prolonged use of the

navigation system controls while driving. Bring the vehicle to

a halt in a safe and legal manner before attempting such

operations.

Warning: When navigating, carefully compare

information shown on the screen to all available navigation

sources, including road signs, road closures, road

conditions, traffic congestion, weather conditions, and other

factors that may affect safety while driving. For safety, always

resolve any discrepancies before continuing navigation, and

defer to posted road signs and road conditions.

Warning: The navigation software is designed to provide

route suggestions. It is not a replacement for driver

attentiveness and good judgement. Do not follow route

suggestions if they suggest an unsafe or illegal manoeuvre or

would place the vehicle in an unsafe situation.

Navigation Controls

Press the (A) button or select Nav from the main menu to

open the navigation screen.

Audio Controls

Use the left scroll wheel on the steering (B) to adjust the volume

for navigation announcement. Press and hold the scroll wheel

button during a navigation announcement to mute.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 2 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Satellite Navigation 9.3

Navigation Menu

From the navigation menu select from the following options:

• OPTIONS

(Refer to ’Route Settings’, page 9.3)

• TRAFFIC

(Refer to ’Traffic’, page 9.6)

• ROUTE

(Refer to ’Route’, page 9.7)(Only shown during route

guidance)

• POSITION

(Refer to ’Position’, page 9.8)

• REPEAT ANNOUNCEMENT

Repeat the last route guidance announcement. (Only shown

during route guidance)

• DESTINATION

(Refer to ’Destination’, page 9.9)

Options

Route Settings

Choose from the following route settings:

• Fast Route

Finds a with the shortest journey time.

• Dynamic Route

Finds a route with the shortest journey time but updates with

live traffic reports.

• Eco Route

Finds an economical route. Journey time may be increased

compared to using Fast Route.

• Short Route

Finds a route with the shortest distance.

Calculate Alternative Routes

Switch to ON or OFF to provide alternative route calculations.

Live Traffic information is not available in all markets.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 3 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

9.4 Satellite Navigation

Avoid Options

Select from the following options:

• Avoid Area

Select Avoid New Area and choose from:

•Using Map

•Address Entry

Select a previous location

Push the CONTROL DIAL to the right to bring up the

following options:

• Display/Change: Show and move the area to be avoided.

• Delete: Delete the current saved area.

• Delete All: delete all saved areas.

• Avoid Motorways

• Avoid Ferries

• Avoid Motorail Trains

• Avoid Tunnels

• Avoid Unpaved Roads (Market Specific)

• Use Vignette Roads

(Market Specific)

• Use Toll Roads

•Payment in Cash

• Electronic Billing

•Off

Map Orientation

Select to change the orientation of the display map. Select from:

• North Up

Map is displayed so that north is always up.

• Heading Up

Map is displayed so that the direction of travel is always up.

The red tip of the compass shows north.

• 3-D Map

Map is displayed so that the direction of travel is always up,

and varying angles of elevation are shown depending on the

immediate surrounding environment. The red tip of the

compass shows north.

Route calculation includes roads which require you to pay a time-

based fee (vignette) which allows temporary use of the road network.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 4 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Satellite Navigation 9.5

Map Content

Choose from the following map content options:

• POI Symbols on Map

• Standard Symbols:

Shows default point of interest symbols.

• Personal Symbols:

Search from a number of available points of interest to add

to add to the map.

• No Symbols:

Remove point of interest symbols from the map display.

• Text Information on Map

• Current Street:

Street name is displayed at the bottom of the display.

• Geo-Coordinates:

Show the longitude, latitude, elevation and number

satellites available at the bottom of the display.

• None:

No information is displayed at the bottom of the display.

• Motorway Information:

Press to display the nearest services, rest areas and motorway

junctions.

• Next Intersecting Street:

Shows the next crossroad or joining street at the upper ed

of the display when route guidance is not active.

• Map Version:

Shows the map software data version.

Personal POIs

Load any saved personal points of interest from an SD Memory

Card

Settings

Choose from the following system settings:

• Announce Street Names:

Set to announce street names during changes of direction.

(Market S

pecific)

• Audio Fadeout:

Set to reduce the volume of media sources during

navigation announcement.

• Audible Info During Phone Call:

Set to enable or disable audible information during a ph

one

call.

• Reserve Fuel Level:

Set to automatically search for a fuel station when the fuel

tank reserve level is reached.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 5 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

9.6 Satellite Navigation

Traffic

Traffic Reports from FM RDS-TMC

An RDS-TMC radio station transmits traffic reports in addition to

the radio programme. your vehicle can receive these reports and

make adjustments to the route guidance. information received

will be displayed in the bottom corner of the display and the

symbol "TMC".

Traffic Menu

Select Traffic from the lower information bar to access the Traffic

Menu.

Traffic Symbol Information

Shows a list of available traffic symbols for a traffic report. Select

Details for a description of the incident and choose Next or

Previous to display other incidents along the route.

Select Map to move the map. moving the map enables other

traffic incidents to be shown.

Messages On The Route

Shows traffic reports along the route.

If there is more than one traffic report, they will be indicated by

a page number. For example 1/3. Push the CONTROL DIAL left

or right to scroll between reports.

Read Out All Message On Route

Select to read out traffic reports along the route. If there are no

traffic reports this option will not be available.

To cancel the report being read, select Cancel Read-Aloud

Function.

Note: The read-aloud function is interrupted automatically if

the route is recalculated following a new traffic report.

Read Traffic Announcements Automatically

Select to automatically read aloud all traffic reports on route.

Announcements are made automatically when approaching

traffic incidents.

All Messages

Shows a list of all roads and areas affected by traffic reports.

Roads and areas not on route also appear in the list. Select a

location to display the traffic report.

Cancel Traffic Announcements

Press and hold the volume scroll wheel button on steering wheel

during traffic announcements to set traffic announcements to off.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 6 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Satellite Navigation 9.7

Route

Destination Information

Shows the destination and any intermediate destinations along

with expected arrival time, distance and journey time.

Select a destination to view details. From the details screen you

also have several options:

• Call: Call the destination if details are saved into your list of

available contacts.

• Map: View the destination on the map.

• Save: Save the details to your contact book. Details can be

saved as one of the following options:

• As New Contact: Enter as a new contact in the contact

book.

• Add to Contact: Add address details to an existing contact

in the contact book.

• As "My Address": Set the address as your home address.

• To The Memory Card: Save the address details to an SD

memory card.

Alternative Route

Shows available alternative routes. Select Previous or Next to

display alternative routes.

The current route is shown in light blue, and alternative routes

are shown in dark blue. The most economical route is shown in

green.

Select Start to start a new route.

Detour

Manually add an area to avoid on the route.

Select Beginning and press ENTER. Rotate the CONTROL DIAL

to move through the route and press ENTER to set the beginning

detour area.

Select End and repeat to set the end of the detour area.

Select Start to start a new route with the requested detour area.

Select Delete to delete the set detour.

Route List

Shows the route list as a turn-by-turn list of changes in direction

along the route, with distance from the vehicle's position. Scroll

through the list to show turns along the route on the map display.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 7 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

9.8 Satellite Navigation

Position

Save

Save the current position to theFrom previous destination list.

Saved destination will have a symbol next to the location name.

POI Symbol Guide

Display information about any Points of Interest (POI)s in the

immediate area.

Select Previous or Next to cycle POIs. Select Details to show a

details for that location or POI.

Details shown include the name of the location, address and road

name. Push the CONTROL DIAL down to access the options for

the detail screen. Choose from:

• Map: Return to map display screen

• Call:Call the location if a phone number is available.

• Save: Save the details to your contact book. Details can

saved as one of the following options:

• As New Contact: Enter as a new contact in the contact

book.

• Add to Contact: Add address details to an existing contact

in the contact book.

• As "My Address": Set the address as your home address.

• To The Memory Card: Save the address details to an SD

memory card.

• Continue: Choose Set as intermediate destination

Cancel route guidance

3D Map Rotation

View the area around the vehicle in a 3D perspective. Rotate the

CONTROL DIAL to change the direction of view or push the

CONTROL DIAL to move the map cursor in that direction.

Where Am I?

Shows the current position. The street name is shown along with

the previous turn and next turn in the route list.

If you are not on a recognized road, your position will be

shown as geo-coordinates along with compass bearing.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 8 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Satellite Navigation 9.9

Destination

Cancel Route Guidance

Select to cancel current route guidance

Address Entry

Select to open the address entry screen

Enter information for:

• State/Province

• Town

• Street

• Postal Code

• Keyword Search

Once you have entered one of the above items of information

you can filter your search further by adding more information to

the above or entering one of the following:

• Centre: Centres search of a town or post code area.

• Intersection: List streets that connect to the chosen street.

• No.: Enter a house number

• POIs: Lists local points of interest by category.

• Save: Save the details to your contact book. Details can be

saved as one of the following options:

• As New Contact: Enter as a new contact in the contact

book.

• Add to Contact: Add address details to an existing contact

in the contact book.

• As "My Address": Set the address as your home address.

• To The Memory Card: Save the address details to an SD

memory card.

• Start/Continue: Select to begin route guidance. If you have

selected CALCULATE ALTERNATIVE ROUTES a list available

routes are shown (Refer to ’Alternative Route’, page 9.7).

A destination cannot be entered if the vehicle is travelling faster than 5

km/h (3 mph)

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 9 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

9.10 Satellite Navigation

Keyword Search

Keyword search can be use to find a location without having to

enter the full name. Search also allows for spelling mistakes and

fragments of words. Town and street names can be searched for

at the same time by separating with .

For example: LON REGE can find Regent Street in London.

Whilst entering letters into the search field, the results field will

update to show the number of exact and approximate matches.

Results are shown in the format (XXX/YYY) where XXX are the

number of exact matches to your search and YYY are the number

of approximate matches.

Once a location, or part of a location, has been entered the

following results are shown:

•Addresses

•POIs in the vicinity

•All POIs

•List Search

A value of 999+ is displayed if there are too many results to

display.

Addresses

Shows a list of both exact and approximate addresses that match

your search terms. Exact matches are shown at the top of the list

in alphabetical order. The search terms used are shown

highlighted in the results. Scroll through the results to make a

selection. The Address Entry screen (Refer to ’Address Entry’,

page 9.9)will then be shown with fields populated. Select Start to

begin route guidance.

POIs in the Vicinity

Shows a list of points of interest that match the search terms.

Results are show in order of distance from your current location.

All POIs

Shows a list of both exact and approximate points of interest that

match your search terms. Exact matches are shown at the top of

the list in alphabetical order. The search terms used are shown

highlighted in the results.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 10 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Satellite Navigation 9.11

From Previous Destinations

Search from a list of previously entered addresses. Scroll through

the list of available locations and press ENTER to select a

destination from the list. Push the CONTROL DIAL right to view

the following options:

• Details: Press ENTER to view a list of details for that

destination.

• Delete: Press ENTER to delete the selected destination.

• Delete All: Press ENTER to delete all previous destinations.

From Contacts

Search from a list of contacts stored on a mobile phone contact

list. Contacts that can be selected for route guidance will be

shown with a compass symbol next to the contact entry. If a MY

ADDRESS entry has been saved this can be access even if no

mobile phone is connected to the vehicle.

Scroll through the list of available locations and press ENTER to

select a destination from the list or push the CONTROL DIAL right

to view the following options:

• Details: View a list of details for that destination.

• Select From Contacts: Select entry from the contacts list.

• Delete Entry: Delete the selected destination.

From POI

Select to choose a location based on a point of interest.

Near Destination

(Only available while route guidance is active)

Choose a point of interest near your destination.

Current Position

Choose a point of interest near your current location.

Other Town

Choose a point of interest based on another town.

Only TOWN or COUNTRY will be available as list to select a

location from.

Search By Name

Search by name for all points of interest on the map, or based on

one of the above search locations.

Search By Phone Number

Search all points of interest that have a phone number listed.

Search results can be filter by entering phone numbers.

All phone numbers are preceded by a two digit country code.

For example +44 for phone numbers in Great Britain.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 11 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

9.12 Satellite Navigation

Using Map

Find a destination using the map display. Move the cursor by

pushing the CONTROL DIAL in the chosen direction. Rotate the

CONTROL DIAL clockwise to zoom out and counter-clockwise to

zoom in. Once you have chosen a destination, press ENTER. The

Address entry screen will then be shown with relevant fields

populated. Select Start to begin route guidance.

Intermediate Destinations

Select to show any intermediate destinations added to your

route. Scroll through the list of intermediate destinations and

press ENTER to view the following options:

• Edit: Edit what point of interest should be in the selected slot

in the list of destinations.

• Move: Move what slot in the list the selected item is.

• Delete: Delete the selected intermediate destination.

To add a new intermediate destination, scroll to an empty slot in

the route list and press ENTER where Add new is displayed.

Select a point of interest from the list and all available locations

along your route will be shown at the top of the list. All available

locations in the vicinity will be shown at the bottom. Press ENTER

to select a location and the Details screen will be shown.

From Memory Card

Load a saved route from a SD memory card.

Only available if a SD Memory card with route data is inserted

into the SD card slot.

Using Geo-Coordinates

Select to enter a destination using geo-coordinates. Rotate the

CONTROL DIAL to increase or decrease the values, and push the

CONTROL DIAL left or right to change between degrees,

minutes, seconds and bearing. Push theCONTROL DIAL up or

down to switch between latitude or longitude.

Once a destination has been entered, select Start Route

Guidance to begin route guidance or select Save to save the

destination to your contact book. The destination can be saved

as one of the following options:

• As New Contact: Enter as a new contact in the contact book.

• Add to Contact: Add address details to an existing contact in

the contact book.

• As "My Address": Set the address as your home address.

• To The Memory Card: Save the address details to an SD

memory card.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 12 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Satellite Navigation 9.13

Navigation Menu

From the navigation display press the NAV button, or push the

joystick up, to access the main vehicle menu and navigate to Nav

to open the navigation menu.

In the navigation menu you will be shows the options that follow:

• Navigation: Returns to the navigation display.

• Compass: Show compass direction as well as current geo-

coordinates. Select Compass on the map to overlay the

compass on the map display screen.

• Qibla: Shows a compass giving the direction of prayer to

Mecca. (Market Specific)

• Drive Information: Cycles through information about the

journey such as the destination location, distance remaining,

distance to next intermediate destination and estimated

arrival time.

• Route Flight: Shows an animated visualisation of the set route

guidance. Select Play to begin visualisation. Select Pause to

pause play through, and Stop to end play through and return

to the start location.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 13 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

9.14 Satellite Navigation

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 14 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Vehicle Settings

Vehicle Settings...........................................................10.2

Time Settings...............................................................10.2

System Settings............................................................10.3

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 1 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

10.2 Vehicle Settings

Vehicle Settings

Acoustic Lock Feedback

Set audible lock note ON or OFF.

Auto-Fold Mirror

Set if mirrors are folded when vehicle is locked to ON or OFF.

Locator Illumination

Set locator illumination ON or OFF.

Exterior Light Delay

Select time delay for main lights when headlamps switched ON

with ignition OFF.

Tow Away Protection

Set tow away tilt sensor ON or OFF.

Interior Motion Sensor

Set interior motion sensors to ON or OFF.

Ambient Light Brightness

Select brightness level for ambient lighting.

Easy Entry/Exit

Set steering wheel easy entry feature ON or OFF

Time Settings

Automatic Time Settings

Select to set automatic time settings to ON or OFF.

Time Zone

Select the required local time zone. For example, London GMT.

Once a time zone has been selected, the Summer Time menu will

open to allow adjustment for summer time settings.

Summer Time

Set summer time adjustment to Automatic, ON or OFF

Set Time Manually

Opens a graphical interface that allows the time to be set

manually using the rotary joystick.

Format

Use to set the format for date and time.

Not available for all time zones.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 2 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Vehicle Settings 10.3

System Settings

Favorite Functions

When Favorite Functions is selected the below menu options are

available. Rotate the joystick to select:

• Navigation

•Radio

•Media

•Vehicle

• Climate Control ON/OFF

•A/C ON/OFF

Press ENTER on a menu item to access the following options for

that item:

• Reassign

•Rename

•Move

•Delete

Display

Select Display to access the display settings options:

•Day

Brighter display colours for clearer viewing during daytime

driving conditions.

•Night

Dark display colours to reduce glare when driving at night.

•Automatic

Automatically change between day and night display when

conditions change.

•Brightness

Change the level of display brightness between -5 and +5.

Language

Select te language for the vehicle infotainment system from one

of the below languages:

• Arabic

•Czech

•Danish

•English (UK)

•English (US)

•French

•German

• Hangul (Korean)

• Italian

•Japanese

•Polish

•Portuguese

•Russian

• Simplified Chinese (Mandarin)

•Spanish

•Swedish

• Traditional Chinese (Cantonese)

• Traditional Chinese (Mandarin)

•Turkish

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 3 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

10.4 Vehicle Settings

Voice Control

• Help Window

• Start New Individualisation

• Delete Individualisation

• Individualisation ON

Text Reader Speed

Select to choose a text reader speed from Fast, Medium or Slow.

360° Camera

Select to choose between activation by R Gear or Object

Detection

Touchpad

Select to set Activate Touchpad or Read Out Handwriting

Recognition to ON or OFF.

Wi-Fi

Select to open Wi-Fi details(Refer to ’Wi-Fi Hotspot’, page 8.18)

Activate Bluetooth

Select to set Bluetooth to ON or OFF

Automatic Volume Adjust

Select to set automatic volume adjust to ON or OFF

Import/Export Data

Select to import or export data such as vehicle settings or

navigation data, to a portable media device such as a USB device

or SD card. This data can then be used to transfer to another

vehicle or to load settings after disconnecting a battery.

Reset

Select to restore all default settings.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 4 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Convertible Roof

Roof Operation...........................................................11.2

Roll-Over Protection System........................................11.4

Wind Deflector ...........................................................11.5

Emergency Roof operation ..........................................11.8

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 1 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

11.2 Convertible Roof

Roof Operation

Warning: Before raising or lowering the roof, make sure

that all occupants are clear of the tonneau panel, the

windscreen frame and door windows.

Warning: Misuse of the roof switch, especially by

children, can result in injury due to entrapment in the roof

mechanism and locking points.

Caution: Aston Martin recommend that the roof is not

operated at temperatures of 0°C and below.

Caution: Make sure that the roof is always fully raised or

fully lowered.

Caution: Do not attempt to lower the roof if any objects or

clothing are laying on top of the roof or tonneau panel.

Caution: Before closing or opening the roof, make sure

that there are no objects placed on the rear sloping deck area

which could interfere with the folded, stored roof, especially

the heated rear windscreen glass. Even small objects can

cause damage.

Caution: Continuous use of the roof without the engine

operating will cause the vehicle battery to rapidly discharge.

To Operate The Roof

Warning: Keep the vehicle road speed down to a

minimum until the roof has completed its operation.

Caution: Aston Martin recommend that the roof is only

operated while the vehicle is stationary.

Caution: Aston Martin recommend that the engine is

always running when operating the roof mechanism to

maintain optimal battery performance.

The deck lid will lock and will stay locked during roof lowering

and raising operations.

Before operating the convertible roof:

• The deck lid must be closed.

• The ignition must be ON and the engine must be running.

• Outside temperature must be above -10°C.

• The variable load device must be in the lower position.

• Headroom (A) 70 inches is available for the roof to raise

lower.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 2 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Convertible Roof 11.3

Operation

Warning: If roof movement is not complete the message

"Open/close top completely" will be shown in the instrument

cluster.

To operate the roof use the switch (B) in the centre console.

To Lower the Roof: Pull and hold the switch backwards to lower

the roof.

To Raise the Roof: Push and hold the switch forwards to raise the

roof.

Once roof movement is complete, a confirmation sound will be

heard from the instrument cluster.

Window Operation

The windows can be lowered and raised independently of the

roof. When the roof is fully lowered or raised use the roof switch

to lower and raise the rear quarter windows:

Roof Fully Lowered: Pull back and hold the roof switch to lower

or raise the door and rear quarter windows.

Roof Fully Raised: Push and hold the roof switch to lower or

raise the rear quarter windows.

Roof Relaxation

The roof system continually monitors the roof position. If the roof

is in a position between fully open and fully closed for 7 minutes

with the ignition on, the roof will close. there will be a warning

sound and the roof will relax and close to it's stowage position to

its lowest position.

If the key is removed from the vehicle ignition, the roof system

will not wait the 7 minutes and will close after the audible

warning.

Warning: The roof can fall rapidly as the roof system loses

hydraulic pressure. Keep away from the roof mechanism

when the audible warning begins, to prevent injury or

entrapment.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 3 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

11.4 Convertible Roof

Over-speed Operation

Vehicle speed should be below 50 km/h (30 mph)

If the vehicle speed exceeds 55 km/h, the convertible roof will

stop opening or closing. This can restrict the view from the rear

of the vehicle and can cause an accident. Reduce the vehicle

speed to below 50 km/h. Press the roof switch again to continue

roof operation.

When safe to do so, continue the roof movement. If the roof is

left in it's paused position for seven minutes, hydraulic pressure

will be lost in the roof mechanism. The roof and tonneau lid will

relax and drop down. Powered roof operation will be stopped

until the roof has been manually fully raised.

Roll-Over Protection System

Warning: Do not attempt to service or modify the

deployable roll-bar system.

Warning: Do not allow any person to sit on the

deployable roll-bar covers at any time.

Warning: Do not place any objects on the top of the

deployable roll-bar covers.

Warning: Do not attempt to reset the deployable roll-bar

system after it has deployed.

Warning: Do not attempt to raise or lower the roof after

the deployable roll-bar system has deployed.

Caution: If the roof is raised the deployable roll-bars will

break through the rear glass.

Caution: Extreme manoeuvres may cause the vehicle

system to predict a roll-over event and activate the roll-over

protection system.

The roll-over protection system has electronic sensors mounted

to the vehicle body that monitor and determine if a roll-over has

taken place. If the system senses a rollover, two roll bars mounted

under trim panels in the tonneau lid, will deploy to protect

vehicle occupants.

If the roll-bars are deployed the door mounted airbags will

also be deployed to further protect vehicle occupants.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 4 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Convertible Roof 11.5

Warning Labels

Do Not Cover is embossed into tonneau cover above the roll

bars.

Wind Deflector

The wind deflector can be used to greatly reduce wind

turbulence when the roof is lowered. It is easily installed to

mounts in the vehicle and can be left in place with the roof raised

or lowered.

Caution: Take care when adjusting the driver or passenger

seat position with the wind deflector installed. Make sure that

the seats do not come into contact with the wind deflector.

Storage

The wind deflector can easily be folded and stowed away when

not used. When the wind deflector is not required, remove it

from the vehicle and place it in the storage bag. Place the storage

bag in the vehicle luggage compartment.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 5 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

11.6 Convertible Roof

Installation

To install the wind deflector:

1. Remove the wind deflector from the storage bag.

2. Unfold the base panels.

3. Open the main net panel and join the two base panels with

the snap connectors.

aution: Do not try to join the base panels with the snap

connector before folding down from their stored position. If

you do, you will damage the snap connectors.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 6 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Convertible Roof 11.7

4. Insert the two locating tabs into the rear seat belt openings.

Use the two slide bolts to lock the wind deflector above the

rear seats

When the wind deflector is installed it can used in the raised or

lowered position. Grab the top bar of the wind deflector to raise

or lower the panel until it clicks into position.

Caution: Do not use the wind deflector to store items. This

can cause damage to the wind deflector such as a rip in the

net area.

Caution: Do not grab the main net panel. Sharp objects

can pierce of otherwise damage the net.

Removal

To remove the wind deflector, do the installation procedure in

reverse.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 7 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

11.8 Convertible Roof

Emergency Roof operation

In the unlikely event of the roof failing during raising or lowering,

it can be manually raised and locked.

Warning: Make sure the ignition is set to off before you

begin this procedure. This will prevent accidental operation

of the roof which can cause injury.

Warning: Aston Martin recommend that a minimum of

two people are required to manually raise and lock the roof.

The roof mechanism is heavy and will move very slowly when

being raised manually.

Warning: Keep fingers clear of the roof linkage when

moving the roof manually.

Caution: Vehicle Security: If the roof fails, always raise and

lock the roof. Do not lower the roof as tonneau lid locks will

not be available.

If the roof fails in the stored position it can stay stored and

locked if required. Contact your Aston Martin Dealer.

If the roof fails after the tonneau locks have been released the

message "Open/close top completely" will show in the instrument

cluster and a continuous audible warning will sound until the roof

has been locked in the raised position.

To Raise the Roof

Once the manual roof raise procedure is complete, you will

not be able to operate the convertible roof until it has been reset

by an Aston Martin Dealer.

1. Remove the wind deflector (if installed)

2. Remove the head rests (A) for the rear seats.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 8 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Convertible Roof 11.9

3. Remove the roof emergency tool (B) and put to one side.

This will be needed to lock the roof.

4. Pull the two release cables (C) for the tonneau latches.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 9 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

11.10 Convertible Roof

5. Lift the tonneau cover at the points shown. 6. Push the hinge pivot (D) rearward to lock the tonneau into

position.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 10 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Convertible Roof 11.11

7. With a person each side, support the tension bow (E) and

fully lift the roof to its closed position.

Caution: The tension bow must not be allowed to fall until

the front latches for the roof are in their receivers. If the

tension bow does fall back before this point, the inner lining

for the roof will be damaged.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 11 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

11.12 Convertible Roof

8. Whilst supporting the tension bow, unlock the hinge and

close the tonneau cover.

9. Once the tonneau cover is fully closed, lower the tension

bow.

Caution: Do

not allow the tonneau lid to rest on the

roof

fabric.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 12 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Convertible Roof 11.13

10. Inside the vehicle, remove the trim plug from the front

header panel.

11. Use the small end of the roof emergency tool to remove the

screw (D) from the roof motor.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 13 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

11.14 Convertible Roof

12. Use the large end of the roof emergency tool to disengage

the drive spline and turn the motor one turn counter-

clockwise.

You must contact you Aston Martin dealer to reset the driv

to the roof latch motor.

If the roof is manually raised or lowered, both the tension

bow and the tonneau cover cannot be locked.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 14 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Maintenance and Technical Data

Introduction................................................................12.2

Servicing Precautions...................................................12.3

Catalytic Converters ....................................................12.5

Fault Conditions..........................................................12.6

Vehicle Lifting .............................................................12.7

Owner Maintenance Checks .......................................12.8

Hood Release............................................................12.10

Fluid Checks and Capacities......................................12.11

Washers and Wipers .................................................12.16

Chassis Systems .........................................................12.17

Wheels and Tires.......................................................12.19

US Department of Transportation..............................12.25

Electrical Systems ......................................................12.33

Vehicle Care .............................................................12.46

Powertrain Specifications...........................................12.50

Performance .............................................................12.53

Dimensions...............................................................12.54

Vehicle Recovery.......................................................12.58

Fuel...........................................................................12.61

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 1 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

12.2 Maintenance and Technical Data

Introduction

Each item in the service schedules must be performed on time as

failure to do so may void the new vehicle warranty or other

warranties. It is the owner’s responsibility to see that the vehicle

is maintained correctly and in accordance with the

manufacturer’s service schedules.

Due to the sophistication of the various systems and the

specialized equipment required to maintain this vehicle, owner

maintenance should be restricted to the routine procedures

described in this owner’s guide.

If you think that this vehicle is not functioning correctly, please

return it to an Aston Martin Dealer to be checked professionally.

Restraint Systems

Aston Martin recommend that the inflatable (airbags) restraint

systems and seat belt components installed to this vehicle are

replaced at 10 year intervals from the date of manufacture on the

certification label.

Electronic Fuel Injection

Warning: If the fuel system is allowed to run dry, the fuel

pump(s) can be permanently damaged.

Warning: Any modifications or additions to the fuel

system not specifically designed by Aston Martin are

prohibited. If installed, they can cause damage to the fuel

system which, in some circumstances, could cause fire. All

Service Action and Safety Recall Actions must be undertaken

by an Aston Martin Dealer.

The electronic fuel injection system requires specialist equipment

and test facilities to set up and maintain so that the vehicle gives

maximum performance, coupled with economy, reliability and

safe vehicle emissions. You are, therefore, strongly advised to

entrust all service work to an Aston Martin Dealer.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 2 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Maintenance and Technical Data 12.3

Parts and Lubricants

Aston Martin recommends that when performing a servicing task,

the recommended lubricants (Refer to ’Fluid Specifications’, page

12.14) and parts are used

Caution: If oils or lubricants are used which do not meet

the required fluid specification, vehicle components may

experience excessive wear, a build-up of sludge and deposits

or cause increased pollution. If it is evident to Aston Martin

that use of products other than those which are

recommended by the manufacturer have caused damage to

the vehicle or engine, Aston Martin may refuse to authorize

the repair of such damage under the terms of the

manufacturer’s warranty.

Emission Warranty

The emission control systems installed to vehicles for certain

markets are covered by a separate warranty. A statement of the

provisions is given in the Warranty section of this Owner’s Guide.

You are advised to familiarise yourself with all warranty

conditions at the earliest opportunity after taking delivery of your

vehicle.

Servicing Precautions

To avoid personal injury, the following safety precautions must be

observed when the hood is open and the engine is operating or

the ignition is ON.

Warning: Protect yourself against dangerous substances .

Warning: Keep hands, hair, tools, items of clothing and

jewellery clear of all drive belts, pulleys and operating

mechanisms. The cooling fans may operate even though the

engine is not operating.

Warning: Avoid skin contact with all exhaust system and

engine components, engine fluids and escaping steam. They

may be hot and can cause scalding or burns.

Warning: Any loose objects, such as ties, should be

removed before working on a vehicle. Any jewellery should

also be removed before working on a vehicle, especially the

electrical system.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 3 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

12.4 Maintenance and Technical Data

Warning: Do not breathe exhaust fumes. Exhaust fumes

contain carbon monoxide. Carbon monoxide is a dangerous

gas, which is colourless and odourless and can cause

unconsciousness and may be fatal. Never start or leave the

engine running in an enclosed, unventilated area.

Warning: Do not work beneath the vehicle with a vehicle

lifting jack as the only support. Place suitable stands under

the vehicle.

Warning: Keep children and pets clear of the vehicle. Do

not let anyone inside the vehicle unless specifically working

to your instructions.

Warning: Whenever possible, work in the engine

compartment with the engine cool, the ignition OFF and the

vehicle battery disconnected.

Warning: Petrol is highly flammable and, in confined

spaces, is also explosive and toxic. In the event of spillage,

set the engine to OFF. Do not use a flame or spark near fuel

or fuel vapour. Do not smoke near fuel or fuel vapour. Do

not inhale fuel vapour or fumes.

Dangerous Substances

Warning: Dangerous substances should be kept out of

reach of children.

Warning: Many liquids and other substances used in

motor vehicles are poisonous and should under no

circumstances be consumed and should, so far as possible,

be kept from contact with the skin. These substances include

battery electrolyte, antifreeze, oil, brake and clutch fluid,

petrol, windscreen washer additives, lubricants, refrigerant

and various adhesives.

Warning: Particular care should be taken to avoid

unnecessary contact with used engine oil. Always read

carefully the instructions printed on labels or stamped on

components and follow them carefully. Such instructions are

included for reasons of your health and personal safety.

Never disregard them.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 4 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Maintenance and Technical Data 12.5

Engine Oils

Warning: Prolonged and repeated contact with used

engine oils can cause serious skin disorders, including

dermatitis and cancer. Avoid excessive contact, wash

thoroughly after contact. Keep out of reach of children.

When your oil is changed, be sure that it is done by an

experienced person. In addition, observe all laws regarding

the disposal of waste oil and toxic fluids.

Protect The Environment

Warning: It is illegal to pollute drains, water courses, or

soil. Use authorized waste disposal facilities, including civic

amenity sites and garages providing facilities for receipt of

used oil. If in doubt, contact your local authority for advice.

Catalytic Converters

Warning: Do not park over dry grass, leaves or other

combustible material. Significant fire risk exists because of

residual heat in the catalytic converters.

Warning: Do not drive through deep water. Rapid cooling

of catalysts may cause them to break up.

Catalytic converters convert harmful exhaust gasses into less

noxious substances and so reduce environmental pollution. They

operate at high temperatures and continue to radiate a

considerable amount of heat after the ignition has been set to

OFF.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 5 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

12.6 Maintenance and Technical Data

Fault Conditions

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 6 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Limphome Mode

If a fault is detected the vehicle will go into one of three limp

home modes:

Electrical: GEARBOX FAULT REDUCED FUNCTION will show

in the instrument cluster. Touchtronic and sport modes will be

disabled and gearshifts will not be possible. The transmission

will select either 3rd or 6th gear depending on the vehicle

speed at the time of the fault.

In certain circumstances forward drive will be restricted to a

fixed gear.

At a speed above 20 km/h (13 mph) the vehicle will

continue in 3rd or 6th gear.

Contact your Aston Martin Dealer.

Mechanical: LIMPHOME NO GEAR CHANGE will show in the

instrument cluster and a warning sound will be heard. If travelling

forwards in auto drive or touchtronic mode the vehicle will go

into 6th gear.

If entering mechanical limp home mode in any position other

than auto drive or touchtronic mode the park-lock will come ON.

Contact your Aston Martin Dealer.

Maintenance and Technical Data 12.7

Vehicle Lifting

Warning: Make sure that no persons are in the vehicle

before the vehicle is lifted.

Warning: Make sure that the park brake is applied and

that the vehicle transmission is in P (Park).

Warning: Make sure that the vehicle is parked on firm

and level ground to give a secure base for the jack.

Warning: Do not lift the vehicle by placing a jack or other

lifting equipment under the suspension arms.

Warning: Do not use a jack or other lifting equipment

further inboard on the vehicle than the jacking points

shown.

If this vehicle is to be raised using a vehicle jack make sure that

the following jacking points are used.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 7 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

12.8 Maintenance and Technical Data

Owner Maintenance Checks

In the interests of safety and reliability, it is advisable to carry out

the following checks at the intervals suggested (more frequently if

your vehicle is heavily used or operating in adverse conditions),

and always before starting on a long journey. Refer to the

following pages for advice and check procedures.

Before Use Check:

• Operation of lamps, horn, indicators, wipers, washers and

warning symbols

• Check there is sufficient fuel for the intended journey,

particularly at night and before entering motorways

• Operation of the seat belts

• Operation of the brakes

• Check for fluid deposits underneath the vehicle.

Weekly Checks

(daily if driving large distances or touring)

• Tire condition

• Coolant level

• Brake fluid level

• Air conditioning operation

• Windscreen washer fluid level

• Check operation of windscreen washers.

Fuel Filler Bowl

During fuel filling check that the fuel filler bowl drain pipe is free

from debris which may block the pipe. If the pipe is blocked,

water can not drain from the bowl and can overflow into the fuel

tank.

Engine Oil Level

Caution: It is important to check the engine oil level

regularly. Running the engine with engine oil below the lower

mark or above the upper mark can cause serious engine

damage.

Check the engine oil level every fourth fuel tank fill or weekly -

which ever is the sooner (Refer to ’Engine Oil Level’, page 12.12).

Tool Kit

The following emergency items are located in stowage box tool

kit in the luggage compartment.

[1] : Tire repair kit (Refer to ’Tire Inflation Kit’, page 12.24).

[2] : Towing eye

[3] : Funnel for emergency fuel fill

[4] : Locking wheel nut key (optional)

[5] : First aid kit (optional)

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 8 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Maintenance and Technical Data 12.9

Aeroblade Filter

Coupe Only

Over time it may become necessary to clean the filter traps for

the Aeroblade ducts.

• Press the release tab (1) down to unlatch the filter trap.

• Remove the filter trap (2) from the aeroblade duct. Clean the

filter and remove any obstructions such as leaves.

• Slide the filter trap back into the aeroblade duct making sure

the guides engage correctly.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 9 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

12.10 Maintenance and Technical Data

Hood Release

To open the hood press the button (A) located on the end of the

instrument panel to release the hood latches.

The hood release button is always on the driver's end of the

instrument panel and changes with hand of drive.

Lift on the rear edges of the hood and pull upward. Lift the hood

until fully open. The hood is then held open by two gas struts.

To close the hood lower the hood until it starts to fall under its

own weight. At that point let the hood fall to close. If the hood

does not shut, open the hood again and repeat the closure

procedure, this time assist using light hand pressure as the hood

falls

Emergency Hood Release

In the unlikely event that either the hood release switch fails to

operate or the vehicle battery is fully discharged there are two

manual release cables (A) located either side of the instrument

panel.

Pull both cables to release the latches for the hood.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 10 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Maintenance and Technical Data 12.11

Fluid Checks and Capacities

Warning: Engine components may be hot and could cause

severe burns.

V12 Engine

[1] : Engine oil filler cap.

[2] : Engine oil dipstick.

[3] : Engine coolant reservoir.

[4] : Brake fluid reservoir

V8 Engine

e charge-cooler system is maintenance free and should

only require checking by your Aston Martin Dealer during regular

vehicle services.

Changes sides for left and right hand drive.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 11 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

[1] : Engine oil dipstick.

[2] : Engine oil filler cap.

[3] : Engine coolant reservoir.

[4] : Brake fluid reservoir

[5] : Forward engine cover

[6] : Charge-cooler coolant reservoir (under forward engine

cover (5)).

12.12 Maintenance and Technical Data

Engine Oil Level

Warning: Engine oil or components may be hot and could

cause severe burns.

Caution: Running the engine with engine oil below the

lower mark or above the upper mark can cause serious

engine damage.

Caution: This vehicle's warranty may be invalidated if

damage is caused by the use of incorrect engine oil. Low

quality or obsolete oils do NOT give the protection required

by modern, high performance engines.

Caution: Failure to use engine oil that meets the required

specification can cause excessive engine wear, a build up of

sludge and deposits, and increased pollution. It could also

lead to engine failure (Refer to ’Fluid Specifications’, page

12.14).

Engine Oil Level Check:

• The vehicle should be on level ground.

• Check the engine oil level every fourth fuel tank fill or we

ekly

- which ever is the sooner.

1. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating

temperature.

2. Wait 15 minutes to allow to engine oil level to become

stable

3. Withdraw and wipe the dipstick clean using a lint free cloth.

4. Fully insert the dipstick into the dipstick tube with the Min.

and Max. marking on the blade upwards (facing towards the

engine). Withdraw the dipstick again.

5. The engine oil level should read between the Min. and Max.

marks.

6. Put the dipstick back into the dipstick tube.

7. If required, remove the engine oil filler cap and top up the

engine oil with the recommended engine oil.

V12 engine: Approximately two quarts are required to bring

the oil level from Min. to Max.

V8 engine: Approximately one and a half quarts are required to

bring the oil level from Min. to Max.

8. Wait for approximately two minutes for the engine oil

set

tle, then repeat steps 3 to 6 . Add engine oil if required

Do not overfill.

9. Securely fit the engine oil filler cap.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 12 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Maintenance and Technical Data 12.13

Engine Oil Level Sensing

Caution: The electronic engine oil level sensing system

does not replace the need for the owner to regularly check

the engine oil using the dipstick. Check the engine oil level

every fourth fuel tank fill or weekly - which ever is the

soonest.

This vehicle has an electronic engine Oil Level Sensing (OLS)

system which records the engine oil level every vehicle start if the

vehicle has been left for 4 or more hours, if the vehicle is on level

ground, and if it is within a pre-set oil temperature range.

Caution: Running the engine with engine oil below the

minimum mark on the dipstick can cause serious engine

damage.

The system may not record an oil level if the engine oil

temperature is low.

For the correct engine oil (Refer to ’Fluid Specifications’, page

12.14).

If the engine oil level is approaching the minimum mark the

message OIL LEVEL WARNING CHECK AND TOP UP will show

in the message centre along with an amber warning triangle and

a chime sound. A code will also be stored in the engine

management system. The engine oil level is low and should be

checked and filled to the required level engine oil as soon as

possible. The message will clear when the oil level is filled with a

least 1 litre (1 quart) to the required level and the OLS system has

performed a valid check of the oil level.

Engine Coolant Level

Warning: Do not remove the filler cap until the coolant

system has cooled. Scalding can be caused by escaping steam

or coolant.

Use a cloth or glove to protect hands and protect face and

arms adequately.

1. Remove the reservoir cap to check the coolant level. The

correct coolant level is to the top of the reservoir tank.

2. Make sure that the reservoir cap is secure after topping up.

Caution: Do not over tighten the reservoir cap. This can

cause damage to the reservoir cap or the thread for the

reservoir tank.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 13 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

12.14 Maintenance and Technical Data

Brake Fluid Level

Warning: Do not drive the vehicle if the brake fluid level

is below the minimum mark.

Caution: Make sure that the brake fluid does not contact

the paint work during the topping up operation. Serious paint

work damage can result. If a spillage does occur, immediately

flush any brake fluid from the paint work with clean, fresh

water and then wipe with a clean damp cloth.

The brake fluid level should read between the Min. and Max.

marks.

1. Remove the reservoir cap. Top up to the Max. level.

2. Install the reservoir cap securely.

Fluid Specifications

Fuel

Minimum 95 RON unleaded fuel.

Recommended 98 RON Super unleaded for optimum

performance.

Engine Oil

Caution: To achieve the required high performance of

synthetic lubricants, do not mix with mineral oils.

V12 Engine

A fully synthetic 0W-20 oil meeting the specifications detailed

below can be used. No other viscosity grades or specifications are

acceptable

V8 Engine

A fully synthetic 0W-40 oil meeting the specifications detailed

below can be used. No other viscosity grades or specifications are

acceptable

Authority Standard

API SN

ILSAC GF5

Authority Standard

API SN

ILSAC GF5

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 14 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Maintenance and Technical Data 12.15

Only use oils ‘Certified For Gasoline Engines’ by the American

Petroleum Institute (API). An oil with this trademark symbol

conforms to the current engine and emission system protection

standards and fuel economy requirements of the International

Lubricant Standardization and Approval Committee (ISLAC),

comprised of U.S. and Japanese automobile manufacturers.

Engine Coolant

Contact your Aston Martin Dealer for information on engine

coolant.

Brake Fluid

DOT 4

Air Conditioning Refrigerant

Caution: Refrigerant gas types must not be mixed. If you

do, the air conditioning system can be damaged. If in doubt,

consult your Aston Martin Dealer.

HFC134A / HFO1234YF

Capacities

Market dependent

V12 V8

Fuel Tank 80 Litres

21.1 Gallons

75 Litres Usable

Engine Sump (including filter) 10.8 Litres

11.4 Quarts

8.5 Litres

8.9 Quarts

Engine Coolant (includes

transmission cooling)

29.7 Litres

31.4 Quarts

18.6 Litres

19.6 Quarts

Charge Cooler Coolant N/A 6.7 Litres

7.0 Quarts

Automatic Gearbox (including

cooler)

8.5 Litres

8.9 Quarts

Automatic Transmission

Differential

1.1 Litres

1.1 Quarts

Screen Washer Reservoir 4.0 Litres

4.2 Quarts

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 15 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

12.16 Maintenance and Technical Data

Washers and Wipers

Windscreen Wash Fluid

To refill the washer fluid, open the washer fluid reservoir cap (A)

and top up as required. In winter, to prevent the windscreen

wash fluid freezing, increase the fluid concentration (refer to the

manufacturers recommendations on the windscreen wash fluid

container).

When the level of windscreen wash fluid is low an information

message will show in the message centre and the amber warning

symbol will come ON.

Local or state regulations may restrict the use of volatile

organic compounds (VOCs), which are commonly used as

antifreeze agents in windscreen washer fluid. A windscreen

washer fluid with limited VOC content should be used only if

it provides adequate freeze resistance for all regions and

climates in which the vehicle will be operated.

Windscreen Washer Jets

The washer jet housings are located on the rear edge of the hood.

Each housing contains two washer jets.

Windscreen washer jets are set during manufacture and should

not need adjustment. However, if adjustment is required, adjust

up or down so that the fluid strikes between a third and half way

up the windscreen.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 16 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Maintenance and Technical Data 12.17

Wiper Blade Replacement

To remove a wiper blade, lift the wiper arm and press at point (A)

to release the wiper blade.

Slide a new wiper blade on to the wiper arm until it locks into

place.

Chassis Systems

Vehicle Body

Two door coupe with 2+2 seating

Two door convertible with 2+2 seating

• Extruded aluminium bonded monocoque body structure

• Curlicue front and Aston Martin AeroBlade rear integrated

aerodynamics

• Deployable spoiler

Steering

Electrically assisted, speed sensitive rack and pinion power

steering. Column adjustment for reach and tilt

Turns Lock to Lock

2.375 turns

Turning Circle

11.75 Metres

Total Toe

Refer to your Aston Martin Dealer for the correct data

Suspension

Front

Independent double aluminium wishbone incorporating anti-

dive geometry. Coil over aluminium monotube dampers and

anti-roll bar.

Rear

Multi-link suspension with hollow-cast lower control arms and

hot-forged aluminium link arms. Coil over aluminium monotube

dampers and anti-roll bar.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 17 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

12.18 Maintenance and Technical Data

Brakes

Foot Brake

Park Brake

Electrically operated independent park brake calipers on each

rear brake rotor.

Chassis Features

• Three user selectable adaptive damping settings;

•GT

•Sport

•Sport+

• Automatic ride height adjustment

• Anti-Lock Braking System (ABS)

• Hydraulic Brake Assist (HBA)

• Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)

• Emergency Brake Assist (EBA)

• Three-stage Electronic stability Program (ESP)

• Dynamic Torque Vectoring (DTV)

Front Rear

Rotor Construction 2-piece ventilated

rotor

Combination cast

ventilated rotor

Diameter 400mm 360mm

Calipers Six Piston Four Piston

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 18 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Maintenance and Technical Data 12.19

Wheels and Tires

Wheels

Cast Alloy Wheels

Wheel Bolt Torque

Caution: You must use an applicable plastic-sleeved

socket to remove, install, and tighten the wheel bolts. This

will help to prevent damage to the surface of the wheel.

All wheel bolts must be tightened in two stages:

• Tighten every second wheel bolt (in the order shown) to 70

Nm (52 lb/ft) until all five bolts are tightened.

If a locking wheel bolt is installed, this should be installed last.

• Tighten every second wheel bolt (in the order shown) to 150

Nm (111 lb/ft) until all five bolts are tightened.

Front Rear

9J x 20 11J x 20

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 19 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

12.20 Maintenance and Technical Data

Tires

Tires of the correct type, manufacturer and dimensions, with

correct cold inflation pressures are an integral part of every

vehicle’s design. Regular maintenance of tires contributes not

only to safety, but to the designed function of the vehicle.

Road holding, steering and braking are especially vulnerable to

incorrectly pressurized, badly installed or worn tires.

Tires of the correct size and type, but made by different

manufacturers can have widely varying characteristics.

Tire Loading

Tires installed to this vehicle shall have a maximum load rating

not less than 825 kg (1819 lbs) front and 925 kg (2039 lbs) rear,

or a load index of 101 (front) and 105 (rear).

Tire Pressures

Make sure that correct tire pressures are carefully maintained.

Road holding, steering, braking and tire wear are especially

vulnerable to incorrect tire pressures.

Check tire pressures regularly and before starting any journey,

and adjust accordingly.

Tire pressures increase slightly when the tires are hot. For an

accurate reading, tire pressures should be checked when the tires

are cold. After adjusting the tire pressures, make sure that the

valve caps are securely replaced to provide an additional air seal

and to prevent the ingress of dirt.

Tire Air Pressures

Front Rear

Summer Tires 2.5 Bar

36 Psi

2.6 Bar

38 Psi

Winter Tires 2.5 Bar

36 Psi

2.6 Bar

38 Psi

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 20 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Maintenance and Technical Data 12.21

Tire Information

Damage

Tires should be examined at regular intervals for wear and

damage. Inspect the tire treads and sidewalls for damage, i.e.

bulges in the tread or the sidewalls, cracks in the tread groove and

separation in the tread or the sidewalls. If damage is observed or

suspected have the tire inspected by a tire professional.

Stones or other objects which have become lodged in the tire

treads should be carefully removed.

Flat Spots

It is a characteristic of high performance tires that temporary ’flat

spots’ may develop if the vehicle is left standing in high or low

ambient temperatures for any length of time.

These ’flat spots’ will manifest themselves as minor vibrations

when the vehicle is first driven from cold. As the tires warm up to

operating temperature, normal tire shape should be restored and

the vibrations cease. If vibrations persist, consult your

Aston Martin Dealer.

Age

Local regulations on tire life may apply.

Tires degrade over time, even when they are not being used. It is

recommended that tires generally be replaced after six years of

normal service. Heat caused by hot climates or frequent high

loading conditions can accelerate the aging process.

New Tires

When new tires are required consult your Aston Martin Dealer

for advice if the rear tires are also worn. Each wheel and tire unit

must be balanced dynamically and measured for Radial Force

Variation (RFV) to make sure of efficient steering, optimum tire

wear and maximum ride comfort. Because of the potentially high

speeds, it is essential that wheel balancing is carried out when

new tires are installed. Contact your Aston Martin Dealer for

more information.

Running-In New Tires

When new tires have been installed, speed should be limited,

particularly during the first 80 km/50 Miles or so of driving. Fast

cornering, hard braking, and harsh acceleration should also be

avoided during this period.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 21 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

12.22 Maintenance and Technical Data

Tread Wear Marks

Tread wear marks (A) are

incorporated into the

construction of all tires. These

marks are integral moulded ribs

spaced at regular intervals around

the circumference of the tire and

extend across the full width of the

tread, in all primary grooves.

When a tire has worn causing one or more of the marks to be

flush with the outer face of the tread the tire has reached its wear

limit. It then becomes illegal in certain countries and must be

replaced.

Summer Tires

Because of the high performance potential of this vehicle,

Aston Martin strongly recommend replacement of any damaged

or worn tire.

The recommended tires for this vehicle are asymmetrical and

must be installed to the wheel with the tire mark ‘OUTSIDE’ on

the outside of the wheel rim.

The tires are also of different sizes on the front and rear axles,

therefore complete wheels cannot be swapped between axles.

Summer Tire Specifications

Front Rear

Bridgestone S007 255/40 R20 (Y) 295/35 R20 (Y)

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 22 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Maintenance and Technical Data 12.23

Winter Tires

The tires installed as original equipment are designed with a

rubber compound, tread pattern and width specially suited for

high speeds in normal road conditions, but they are less suitable

during extremes of low temperatures, snow and ice. The use of

winter tires will considerably improve handling during these

conditions.

Only use Aston Martin approved winter tires.

Warning: The maximum speed limit of the vehicle should

be reduced when winter tires are installed. Winter tire speed

limits and information should be provided upon installation.

Please consult your Aston Martin Dealer for more

information.

Winter tires must be installed to the correct winter wheels.

Winter tires must be used in vehicle sets, that is, installed on all

four wheels. Do not exceed the tire speed rating when using

winter tires.

Winter Tire Specifications

Snow Traction Devices

Warning: The maximum speed when using snow traction

devices is 48 km/h (30 Mph). Remove the snow traction

devices immediately when the roads are clear of snow.

These are for temporary use when driving in heavy snow

conditions. Snow traction devices should only be installed to the

rear (driven) wheels. For more information regarding the correct

snow traction device to fit to your vehicle, contact your Aston

Martin Dealer.

Front Rear

Bridgestone Blizzak 255/40 R20 W 295/35 R20 W

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 23 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

12.24 Maintenance and Technical Data

Tire Inflation Kit

Warning: Do not use the system to seal a tire that was

damaged while driving with insufficient air pressure (e.g. tire

cuts, cracks, bumps or similar damage). Do not use the

system to seal tires with side wall damage. Only punctures in

the tread area of tires may be sealed.

Warning: Do not stand directly beside the tire while the

compressor is pumping. Watch the side wall of the tire. If

there are any cracks, bumps or similar damage set the

compressor to OFF. The journey should not be continued.

Contact your nearest Aston Martin Dealer.

Warning: If a tire pressure of 1.8 bar (26 Psi) cannot be

reached then the tire can not be sealed. Do not attempt to

re-inflate the tire. Contact your Aston Martin Dealer.

Warning: If the pressure in the tire after driving for 3 km

(2 mph) is below 1.3 bar (19 PSI) the tire has not been

effectively sealed. The journey should not be continued.

Contact your nearest Aston Martin Dealer.

Warning: After a longer period of rest, the tire pressure

should be rechecked.

Caution: The tire sealant kit only provides temporary

mobility. Always refer to local laws and regulations on the use

and repair of tires that have been treated with any form of

temporary mobility aid. Consult a tire specialist for advice.

Inform the tire specialist that the tire contains sealant.

Remains of liquid sealant must be handed over to your dealer

or disposed of in compliance with local waste disposal

regulations. Dispose of empty sealant bottles together with

normal household waste.

Operation

Remove the tire sealant kit from its location in the luggage

compartment. Follow the instructions detailed on the lid.

Read the following instructions and warnings carefully before

using the tire sealant kit. Compliance with these instructions is

vital to make sure of vehicle and user safety. Non-compliance

with these instructions means risking severe tire damage and

hazardous vehicle behaviour which can lead to a road accident

involving damage to property or injury to persons.

• Make sure that the vehicle is parked far enough from traffic so

that there is no danger from passing vehicles and so that you

do not disrupt the traffic.

• The system should only be used between temperatures of –

40°C and 70°C.

• A maximum speed of 80 km/h (50 mph) may not be

exceeded at any time after sealing the tire with the system.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 24 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Maintenance and Technical Data 12.25

• The system provides only a temporary emergency repair for

continuing the journey up to 200 km (125 miles) or to the

nearest Aston Martin Dealer.

• If the nearest Aston Martin Dealer is over 200 km (125

miles)

away, contact your Aston Martin Dealer.

• The system will effectively seal a tire that was punctured by an

object with a diameter of up to 1/4 inch. It is possible that a

tire, especially with greater damage, will not be sealed. Do

not remove objects that punctured the tire if they are still

lodged in the tire.

• The sealant bottle needs to be exchanged before it expire

Do not use the system after the expiry date on the sealant

bottle or casing has been reached. Contact your nearest

Aston Martin Dealer.

• Do not attempt to inflate other objects without using a system

adapter and do not inflate objects with a volume greate

r than

50 litre/ 1.8 Cu Ft (air mattresses, rubber boats, etc.). Do not

let the system pump air for more than 10 minutes without

stopping it and allowing it to cool down.

Both the hose and the bottle of sealant need to be replaced after

using the system. Sealant deposits in a used hose may cause the

system to operate incorrectly. New bottles of sealant can be

purchased from your Aston Martin Dealer.

US Department of Transportation

Uniform Tire Quality Grades

The following information relates to the tire grading system

developed by the National Highway Traffic Safety

Administration, which grades tires by tread wear, traction and

temperature performance. All passenger vehicle tires must

conform to federal safety requirements in addition to these

grades.

Tread Wear

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear

rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a

specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150

would wear one and one-half (1½) times as well on the

government course as a tire graded 100. The relative

performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their

use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to

variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in

road characteristics and climate

Traction

Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based

on straight-ahead braking traction tests and does not include

acceleration, cornering, hydropluning, or peak traction

characteristics.

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C.

The grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as

measured under controlled conditions on specified government

test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have

poor traction performance.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 25 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

12.26 Maintenance and Technical Data

Temperature

Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is

established for a tire that is properly inflated and not

overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive

loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat

buildup and possible tire failure.

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,

representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its

ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions

on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high

temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and

reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden

tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance

which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor

Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels

of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum

required by law.

Tire Sidewall Information

Both US and Canada Federal regulations require tire

manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall

of all tires. This information identifies and describes the

fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides a Tire

Identification Number for safety standard certification and incase

of a recall.

‘P215/65R15 95H’ is an

example of a tire size,

load index and speed

rating. The definitions of

these items are listed

below.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 26 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Maintenance and Technical Data 12.27

Information on ‘P’ Type Tires

The tire size, load index and speed rating for your vehicle may

be different from this example.

[1] P: A tire, designated by the Tire and Rim Association (T&RA),

that may be used for service on cars, SUVs, minivans and light

trucks.

If your tire size does not begin with a letter this may mean it

is designated by either ETRTO (European Tire and Rim Technical

Organization) or JATMA (Japan Tire Manufacturing Association).

[2] 215: The nominal width of the tire in millimetres from side

wall edge to side wall edge. In general, the larger the number, the

wider the tire.

[3] 65: The aspect ratio which gives the tire’s ratio of height to

width.

[4] R: Shows a “radial” type tire.

[5] 15: The wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your

wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new

wheel diameter.

[6] TIRE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (TIN): (Also known as

‘DOT Code’) The Tire Identification Number (TIN) begins with

the letters ‘DOT’ and shows that the tire meets all federal

standards. The next two numbers or letters are the plant code

designating where it was manufactured, the next two are the tire

size code and the last four numbers represent the week and year

the tire was built. For example, the numbers 317 mean the 31st

week of 1997. After 2000 the numbers go to four digits. For

example, 2501 means the 25th week of 2001. The numbers in

between are identification codes used for traceability. This

information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires

a recall.

[7] 95: The tire’s load index. It is an index that relates to how

much weight a tire can carry.

You may not find this information on all tires because it is not

required by federal law.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 27 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

12.28 Maintenance and Technical Data

[8] H: The tire’s speed rating. The speed rating denotes the

speed at which a tire is designed to be driven for extended

periods of time under a standard condition of load and inflation

pressure. The tires on your vehicle may operate at different

conditions for load and inflation pressure. These speed ratings

may need to be adjusted for the difference in conditions. The

ratings range from 81-186 mph. These ratings are listed in the

following chart.

For tires with a maximum speed capability over 149 mph, tire

manufacturers sometimes use the letters ZR. For those with a

maximum speed capability over 186 mph, tire manufacturers

always use the letters ZR.

[9] TIRE TYPE:

•M+S or M/S

Mud and Snow

•AT

All Terrain

•AS

All Season.

[10] TIRE PLY COMPOSITION AND MATERIAL USED: Shows

the number of plies or the number of layers of rubber-coated

fabric in the tire tread and sidewall. Tire manufacturers also must

show the ply materials in the tire and the sidewall, which include

steel, nylon, polyester, and others.

[11] MAXIMUM LOAD: Shows the maximum load in kilograms

and pounds that can be carried by the tire. Refer to the Safety

Compliance Certification Label, which is located on the B-Pillar

or the edge of the driver’s door, for the correct tire pressure for

your vehicle.

[12] TREAD WEAR, TRACTION AND TEMPERATURE GRADES:

(Refer ro page 12.25).

[13] MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE INFLATION PRESSURE: (Refer ro

page 12.31)

Letter Rating Speed Rating

M 81 mph

N 87 mph

Q 99 mph

R 106 mph

S 112 mph

T 118 mph

U 124 mph

H 130 mph

V 149 mph

W 168 mph

Y 186 mph

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 28 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Maintenance and Technical Data 12.29

Vehicle Loading

Warning: Overloading the vehicle can negatively affect

the handling and stopping performance of the vehicle tires.

Correctly loading this vehicle will provide maximum return of

vehicle design performance. Before loading this vehicle,

familiarize yourself with the following terms for determining the

vehicle’s weight ratings from the vehicle’s Safety Compliance

Certification Label.

The illustrations shown are examples and may not accurately

describe the labels on this vehicle.

MFD Date: Month and Year the vehicle was manufactured (e.g.

08 / 16 = August 2016).

GVWR: Gross vehicle weight (curb weight + full payload).

GAWR F: Maximum load on the front axle.

GAWR R: Maximum load on the rear axle.

Seating Capacity: Shows the maximum number of passengers.

Payload: Make sure that the payload (cargo + passengers) does

not exceed this limit.

Tire sizes: The size of tires to be used on this vehicle.

Cold inflation pressure: The maximum recommended tire

inflation pressure.

Both labels are located on the vehicle door opening edge.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 29 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

12.30 Maintenance and Technical Data

Payload: The payload is the combined weight of cargo and

passengers that the vehicle is carrying. The maximum payload for

your vehicle can be found on the Tire Label on the edge of the

driver’s door. Look for ‘The Combined Weight of Occupants and

Cargo Should Never Exceed XXX kg OR XXX lb’ for maximum

payload. The payload listed on the Tire Label is the maximum

payload for the vehicle as built by the assembly plant. If any after

market or Aston Martin Dealer installed equipment has been

installed on the vehicle, the weight of the equipment must be

subtracted from the payload listed on the Tire Label in order to

determine the new pay load.

Gross Vehicle Weight: The maximum recommended weight for

a vehicle, including: the weight of the vehicle itself, fuel and

other fluids, passengers, and all cargo.

Determining the Correct Load Limit

1. Locate the statement ‘The combined weight of occupant

and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lb’ on the

veh

icle’s tire label.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driver

and

passengers that will be riding in the vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers

from XXX kg or XXX lb.

4. The resulting figure equals the available

amount of cargo

and luggage load capacity. For example, if the ‘XXX’ amount

equals 1250 lb and there will be four 150 lb passengers in

the vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load

capacity is 650lb (1250–600 (4x150) = 650 lb).

5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being

loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed

the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated

Ste

p 4.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 30 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Maintenance and Technical Data 12.31

Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure

The maximum permissible inflation pressure is the tire

manufacturer’s maximum permissible pressure and / or the

pressure at which the maximum load can be carried by the tire.

This pressure is normally higher than the manufacturer’s

recommended cold inflation pressure which can be found on the

Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label.

The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than the

recommended pressure on the Safety Compliance Certification

Label or Tire Label.

The recommended cold inflation tire pressures for this vehicle

can also be found in handbook (Refer to ’Tire Pressures’, page

12.20).

Safety Practices

Warning: If your vehicle is stuck in snow, mud, sand, etc.,

do not rapidly spin the tires; spinning the tires can tear the

tire and cause an explosion. A tire can explode in as little as

three to five seconds.

Warning: Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph. The

tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander.

Driving habits have a great deal to do with your tire mileage and

safety.

• Observe posted speed limits.

• Avoid fast starts, stops and turns.

• Avoid potholes and objects on the road.

• Do not run over curbs or hit the tire against a curb when

parking.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 31 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

12.32 Maintenance and Technical Data

Highway Hazards

No matter how carefully you drive there’s always the possibility

that you may eventually have a flat tire on the highway. Drive

slowly to the closest safe area out of traffic. This may further

damage the flat tire, but your safety is more important. If you feel

a sudden vibration or ride disturbance while driving, or you

suspect your tire or vehicle has been damaged, immediately

reduce your speed. Drive with caution until you can safely pull

off the road. Stop and inspect the tires for damage. If a tire is

under-inflated or damaged, deflate it, remove the wheel and

replace it with your spare tire and wheel. If you can not detect a

cause, have the vehicle towed to the nearest repair facility or tire

dealer to have the vehicle inspected.

Tire Terminology

Tire Label: A label showing the OE (Original Equipment) tire

sizes, recommended inflation pressure and the maximum weight

the vehicle can carry.

Tire Identification Number (TIN): A number on the sidewall of

each tire providing information about the tire brand and

manufacturing plant, tire size and date of manufacture. Also

referred to as DOT code.

Inflation Pressure: A measure of the amount of air in a tire.

Standard Load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to

carry a maximum load at 35psi [37psi (2.5bar) for Metric tires].

Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not

increase the tire’s load carrying capability.

Extra Load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a

heavier maximum load at 41psi [43psi (2.9 bar) for Metric tires].

Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not

increase the tire’s load carrying capability.

kPa: Kilo pascal, a metric unit of air pressure.

PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard unit of air pressure.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 32 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Maintenance and Technical Data 12.33

Cold Inflation Pressure: The tire pressure when the vehicle has

been stationary and out of direct sun light for an hour or more

and prior to the vehicle being driven for 1 mile (1.6km).

Recommended Inflation Pressure: The cold inflation pressure

found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label

(found on the edge of the driver’s door).

Bead Area of the Tire: Area of the tire next to the rim.

Sidewall of the Tire: Area between the bead area and the tread.

Tread Area of the Tire: Area of the perimeter of the tire that

contacts the road when mounted on the vehicle.

Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire or a tire and tube

assembly upon which the tire beads are seated.

Electrical Systems

Fuses

The electrical systems are protected by fuses. If any lamps,

accessories, or controls do not function, inspect the applicable

fuse.

If a fuse has blown, the inside element will be melted. If the same

fuse blows again, avoid using that system and consult your Aston

Martin Dealer as soon as possible.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 33 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

12.34 Maintenance and Technical Data

Front Fuses

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 34 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Maintenance and Technical Data 12.35

Engine Primary Fuse Box (A)

V12 Engine

V8 Engine

IP Fuse Box (B)

F1 150A Electronic Power Assisted Steering (EPAS)

F2 100A Cooling Fan

F3 150A Right Side Engine Fuse Box

F4 50A ABS Module

F5 100A Left Side Powerhold Fuse Box

F6 100A Right Side Powerhold Fuse Box

F7 100A Left side Engine Fuse Box

F8 100A Left side Engine Fuse Box

F1 150A Electronic Power Assisted Steering (EPAS)

F2 100A Cooling Fan

F3 150A Right Side Engine Fuse Box

F4 50A ABS Module

F5 100A Right Side Engine Fuse Box

F6 100A Right Side Powerhold Fuse Box

F7 100A Right Side Powerhold Fuse Box

F8 100A Left Side Powerhold Fuse Box

F1 10A Control Dial

Touch Pad

Instrument Cluster Fan

F2 15A HVAC Module

F3 5A Instrument Cluster

F4 15A OBD Socket

F5 20A Infotainment Unit

F6 5A Steering Column Control Module (SCCM)

F7 20A Drive Unit

F8 5A Tracker

F9 7.5A SCCM

F10 15A Common Powertrain Control (CPC) module

F11 5A Centre Stack Panel

F12 5A CPC module

F13 7.5A Central Display

F14 10A OBD Socket

F15 20A Electronic Steering Lock

F16 5A Feedback signal to Body Controller - Front (BCF)

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 35 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

12.36 Maintenance and Technical Data

Right Powerhold Fuse Box (C)

V12 Engine

V8 Engine

F1 - -

F2 - -

F3 - -

F4 - -

F5 10A HEGO Sensor Bank A

Catalyst Monitor Bank A

F6 20A Coolant water pump A

Central Fan Module

F7 5A Oil Level Sensor

Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor A

Cannister Purge A

Starter Relay

Secondary Air Relay A

F8 10A Diagnostic module for Tank Leak (DMTL)

F9 20A Fuel Injectors Bank A

F10 15A Ignitions Coils Bank A

F11 10A Variable Cam Timing (VCT) unit A

Compressor Valve A

Secondary Air Injector A

Variable Oil Pump

Coolant Pump Run On

F12 15A Differential Cooling Pump

F1 - -

F2 - -

F3 - -

F4 - -

F5 - -

F6 20A Coolant water pump B

F7 20A Cooling Fan

F8 20A Coolant water pump A

F9 25A Engine Supply

F10 25A Engine Supply

F11 10A Purge Valve A

Purge Valve B

Diagnostic module for Tank Leak (DMTL)

F12 15A Differential Cooling Pump

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 36 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Maintenance and Technical Data 12.37

Right Side Engine Fuse Box (D)

V12 Engine

V8 Engine

F1 5A ECM Keep Awake

F2 15A Right Side Powerhold Supply

F3 5A Right Side Powerhold Control

F4 5A ABS Module

F5 30A Right Side Wiper Motor

F6 40A Secondary Air Pump A

ABS Module

F7 40A ABS Module

F8 - -

F9 30A Starter Motor

F10 15A Horn

F11 5A Hood Latches

F12 - -

F1 5A ECM Keep Awake

F2 15A Right Side Powerhold Supply

F3 5A ABS Module

F4 30A Starter Motor

F5 30A Left Side Wiper Motor

F6 30A Right Side Wiper Motor

F7 5A Relay Tracker

F8 40A ABS Module

F9 - -

F10 15A Horn

F11 5A Hood Latches

F12 - -

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 37 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

12.38 Maintenance and Technical Data

Left Side Engine Fuse Box (E)

V12 Engine

V8 Engine

Not Applicable

F1 5A ECM Keep Awake

F2 15A Left Side Powerhold Supply

F3 5A Left Side Powerhold Control

F4 5A Tracker

F5 30A Left Side Wiper Motor

F6 40A Secondary Air Pump B

F7 - -

F8 - -

F9 40A Vacuum Pump

F10 - -

F11 - -

F12 5A Vacuum Pump Monitor

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 38 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Maintenance and Technical Data 12.39

Left Powerhold Fuse Box (F)

V12 Engine

V8 Engine

F1 5A ABS Module

F2 5A Engine Control Module Wake up

F3 5A Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

F4 15A Daytime Running Lights

F5 10A HEGO Sensor Bank B

Catalyst Monitor Bank B

F6 20A Coolant water pump Bank B

F7 10A Engine Coolant Level Sensor

MAF Bank B

Cannister Purge B

Secondary Air Relay B

F8 15A Exhaust Flaps

F9 20A Fuel Injectors Bank B

F10 15A Ignitions Coils Bank B

F11 10A VCT Bank B

Compressor Valve B

Secondary Air Injector B

F12 10A Sound regulator

F1 5A ABS Module

F2 5A Engine Control Module Wake up

F3 5A Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

F4 15A Daytime Running Lights

F5 10A Engine Supply

F6 20A Engine Supply

F7 - -

F8 15A Exhaust Flap

F9 - -

F10 - -

F11 - -

F12 - -

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 39 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

12.40 Maintenance and Technical Data

Rear Fuses

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 40 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Maintenance and Technical Data 12.41

Rear Primary Fuse Box (G) Rear Primary Fuse Box (H)

F1 50A IP Fuse box (B) Supply

F2 50A IP Fuse box (B) Supply

F3 50A Fuse Box (K) Supply

F4 50A Fuse Box (K) Supply

F5 60A Fuse Box (K) Supply

F6 30A Right Side Door Module

F7 30A Left side Door Module

F8 40A Body Controller Rear(BCR)

F9 40A BCR

F10 40A Body Controller Front (BCF)

F11 40A BCF

F12 50A Fuse Box (I) Supply

F13 30A IP Fuse box (B) Supply

F14 20A Fuse Box (I) Supply

F1 50A IP Fuse box (B) Supply

F2 40 Fuse Box (J) Supply

F3 50A Fuse Box (J) Supply

F4 50A Fuse Box (J) Supply

F5 50A Fuse Box (J) Supply

F6 - -

F7 30A Heated Rear Window

F8 30A Convertible Roof (Volante only)

F9 40A Convertible Roof (Volante only)

F10 30A Right Side Rear Quarter Window (Volante Only)

F11 30A Left Side Rear Quarter Window (Volante Only)

F12 20A Forward Harness Supply

F13 40A Amplifier

F14 60A HVAC Blower

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 41 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

12.42 Maintenance and Technical Data

Fuse Box (I) Fuse Box (J)

F1 7.5A Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)

F2 5A -

F3 10A Seat Comfort Functions

F4 - -

F5 - -

F6 10A Blind Spot Monitoring Radar

F7 5A Fuel Supply Control Module (FSCM)

F8 5A Occupant Classification System (OCS)

F9 10A Transmission Control Module (TCM)

F10 - -

F11 5A Feedback signal to Body Controller - Rear (BCR)

F12 20A Forward Harness Supply

F1 10A Left Side Seat Module

F2 15A Camera Module

F3 15A TCM

F4 15A Left Side Seat Lumbar Adjust

F5 -

F6 5A Multimedia Box

F7 5A Tuner Box

F8 15A Right Side Seat Lumbar Adjust

F9 5A Body Controller

F10 25A Adaptive Damping Module

F11 10A Right Side Seat Module

F12 5A Rain/Light Sensor

F13 5A Park Distance Control

F14 5A Amplifier (non B&O)

F15 7.5A DSRC Module

F16 5A Brake Pedal Sensor

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 42 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Maintenance and Technical Data 12.43

Fuse Box (K) Battery and Battery Disconnect Switch (L)

Vehicle Battery: Banner 92AH

The vehicle battery is maintenance free and should only require

checking by your Aston Martin Dealer during regular vehicle

services. To access the vehicle battery remove the trim panel,

located in the right rear environment.

F1 10A Microwave Sensors

F2 7.5A ORC

F3 5A Ignition/accessory Relay Control

F4 25A Left Side Seat Module

F5 5A Keyless Go Module

F6 20A Charger Port

F7 25A Right Side Seat Module

F8 5A Deck Lid Latch

F9 25A Fuel Supply Control Module (FSCM)

F10 25A 12V Accessory Socket

F11 15A Centre Stack Panel

F12 20A Deployable Spoiler

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 43 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

12.44 Maintenance and Technical Data

Battery Information

Battery Warnings

Warning: Battery posts, terminals and related accessories

contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after

handling.

Warning: Do not allow flames, sparks or lighted

substances to come near the battery. Batteries normally

produce explosive gases which can cause personal injury.

When working near the battery, always shield your face and

protect your eyes. Always have sufficient ventilation.

Warning: When lifting a plastic cased battery, excessive

pressure on the end walls could cause acid to flow through

the vent caps, resulting in personal injury, damage to the

vehicle or battery. Lift the battery with a battery carrier or

with your hands on opposite corners.

Warning: Keep batteries out of reach of children.

Warning: Batteries contain sulphuric acid. Avoid contact

with skin, eyes or clothing. Shield your eyes when working

near the battery to protect against possible splashing of acid

solution. In case of acid contact with skin or eyes, flush

immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and

get prompt medical attention. If acid is swallowed, get

medical help immediately.

Caution: The engine must never be run with the vehicle

battery disconnected. This can cause damage to vehicle

electrical modules.

Caution: Apart from vehicle recovery, this vehicle must

not be driven if the vehicle battery is incapable of starting the

engine. In this case the vehicle battery must be replaced.

Contact your Aston Martin Dealer.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 44 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Maintenance and Technical Data 12.45

Battery Disconnect Switch

The battery disconnect switch is designed to operate in both

over-current and crash events. When activated, the switch will

completely isolate the electrical system from the battery to

reduce the risk of electric shock or a vehicle fire.

The battery disconnect switch is a single-use item and will require

replacement if it has been activated.

Battery Level Protection

Caution: If the battery is not capable of starting the engine,

replace the battery as soon as possible.

Using vehicle electrical systems such as the infotainment system,

with the ignition ON, but the engine OFF, will drain the battery

charge.

To prevent battery voltage falling below the level required to start

the vehicle, the vehicle's battery monitoring system will shut

down non-essential electrical systems before this happens.

After approximately 2 to 10 minutes (dependent on the rate of

battery charge drain) a message is shown in the infotainment

display models.

If a low battery warning message shows, start the engine and let

it idle so the battery can recharge

, or connect a suitable battery

charger or conditioner.

Lamps

All external lamps are LEDs and contained in a sealed lamp

cluster unit, one either side of the vehicle. The lamp cluster is not

repairable.

If a lamp fails contact your Aston Martin Dealer.

LEDs can last tens of thousands of hours and are resistant to

heat, cold, shock and vibration.

Headlamp

Headlamp Units: Condensation: The headlamp units will

generate condensation under certain conditions. However, this

should clear approximately 10 minutes after the headlamps have

been set to ON.

Other External Lamps

• Rear direction indicators

• Stop and tail lamps.

• Centre High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL).

• Front direction indicator and parking lamps.

• Side direction indicators (mounted in door mirrors).

• Registration plate lamps.

• Rear fog lamp.

• Reverse lamp.

Internal Lamps

All internal lamps are LEDs and are not repairable.

If an LED lamp fails contact your Aston Martin Dealer.

If driving the vehicle to recharge the battery, a journey distance of

approximately 30 miles or 48 km will be sufficient to recharge the

battery.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 45 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

12.46 Maintenance and Technical Data

Vehicle Care

Washing

Warning: Washing and polishing agents containing

silicone should not be applied to glass. This will reduce the

efficiency of the windscreen wipers, causing smears which

will reduce visibility, particularly during darkness and in the

rain.

Caution: Commercially operated automatic vehicle

washes, jet washes and power operated mops are not

recommended. The detergents used can contain certain

chemicals which may, over time, be detrimental to some

exterior parts of the vehicle. Prolonged usage of automatic

vehicle washes and power operated mops will also cause fine

scratches in the paint surface.

Aston Martin are able to supply a range of products to clean and

protect your vehicle. Contact you Aston Martin Dealer for further

information.

During the winter months, it is advisable to wash the vehicle

more frequently, paying particular attention to the underside to

combat the detrimental effects of any salt and sand

contamination picked up from treated roads.

To delay the onset of corrosion developing on the brake

components, Aston Martin recommend that after washing this

vehicle, the vehicle should be driven a short distance to make

sure that all water and cleaning products have dried off.

For best results:

• Do not wash the vehicle in strong sunlight. Let the vehicle

cool before washing.

• Do not use household soaps or detergents.

• Do not direct water hoses at full force around the door and

deck lid seals.

• Do not use a brush on the car body as this will leave little

scratches.

Suggested washing method:

1. Fill two buckets with water. Add a mild neutral detergent, as

directed by the detergent manufacturer to one of th

buckets.

2. Use a hose to remove all dust and mud residue from the

vehicle. Don't use a strong jet, as this can rub grit over the

paint and scratch it.

3. Soak a large clean wash mitt or a soft clean sponge in the

soapy water, and begin applying it to the vehicle. Wash the

vehicle section by section, starting at the top. Circle around

the car several times, washing lower areas with each round.

Rinse the dirt out of the wash mitt or soft sponge in the

bucket with plain water frequently.

4. After one section is washed, rinse it with the hose before

moving on, don't let the soap dry on the paint as this can

stain it. Always keep the vehicle wet, this will prevent

droplets from drying on the paint and leaving water-spots.

5. Dry the car with a chamois leather before it air-dries.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 46 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Maintenance and Technical Data 12.47

Paint Work

Modern water based paints are much safer and more

environmentally friendly than solvent based paints. Water based

paints are however more susceptible to contamination and

marking by corrosive substances. The following list is not

exhaustive but does show the most common contaminants which

may adversely affect your paint work:

• Bird droppings,

• Antifreeze,

•Tree sap,

• Oils and greases,

•Insect remains.

Wash such substances from the vehicle using clean warm water

with vehicle shampoo at the earliest opportunity, especially in

sunny weather which can accelerate contamination.

Other groups of contaminants may be added to this list as

experience of water based paints and finishes increases.

Front Grille

Wash and clean the vehicle's front grille in the same way as the

paint work, but make sure that the front grille is dried off

completely leaving no water droplets on the grille (wipe the front

grille last using a chamois leather): Chrome polish or other

abrasive cleaners must not be used.

Road Wheels

To avoid possible damage to the alloy road wheels, wheel nuts

and wheel centre trims, from a build up of brake dust wash and

clean the alloy road wheels frequently, using a mild soapy water

solution only. Do not use chemical alloy road wheel cleaners, as

they can often have a high acid or alkaline content and could

cause discolouration. Always clean one wheel at a time and do

not allow the cleaning solution to dry on the wheel. Fully flush off

with clean water.

Headlamp Lenses

Only use a mild soapy water solution when washing the

headlamp lenses. Do not use cleaning materials which contain

solvents.

Cleaning materials which contain solvents, i.e. tar remover,

petrol, waxes or polishes, may damage the headlamp lens.

Under Hood Cleaning

Under hood cleaning using high pressure hoses or steam cleaners

should not be carried out. The electronic control module

connections and fuse boxes can be damaged by indiscriminate

use of high pressure cleaning equipment.

Polishing

Approximately twice a year, a good quality polish should be

applied to the body work and then buffed, using a soft lint free

cloth.

The alloy wheel rims should be treated with a cleaner which is

specifically manufactured for this purpose.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 47 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

12.48 Maintenance and Technical Data

Bodywork Maintenance

Check the drain holes in the bottom face of each door

periodically and clear if necessary.

Upholstery, Trim, Carpets and Seats

Warning: Fumes from cleaning solvents may be

dangerous in confined spaces. Make sure that the vehicle is

well ventilated and follow the manufacturer’s printed

instructions when using these products.

Caution: Certain types of clothing, such as denim and

vegetable tanned leather, are prone to ‘dye transfer’. This can

cause discolouration in the leather. Make sure that the

affected areas are cleaned and re-protected as soon as

possible.

The seats and soft trimmed components of this vehicle are

covered in natural leather hide. In general, this natural leather

upholstery requires little attention. The seats should be brushed

with a soft brush from time to time and may be cleaned

occasionally with a cloth damped in soap and water.

Do not use detergents, quick cleansers or furniture polishes.

These products may initially give an impressive result, but their

use will lead to rapid deterioration of the leather and will

invalidate the warranty.

Several times a year, a leather conditioner or preservative should

be used. Appropriate care materials are obtainable from your

Aston Martin Dealer.

Alcantara roof linings and other soft trimmed areas may be

brushed with a soft brush. Stains from water based substances

such as coffee, tea or soft drinks should be cleaned as soon as

possible with mild soap and water.

The brushed and anodized aluminium trim should be cleaned

using a dry clean lint free cloth.

Consult your Aston Martin Dealer for instructions on the removal

of more difficult stains such as oil, grease or ballpoint ink.

Carpets should be cleaned regularly with a vacuum cleaner. Any

stains or grease marks should be removed with a good quality

solvent suitable for use on carpets.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 48 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Maintenance and Technical Data 12.49

Care and Maintenance of Seat Belts

Caution: Do not allow seat belts to be retracted until they

are completely dry.

To make sure that the restraint webbings are in correct working

order, regularly check the seat belts. Look for fraying, cuts, burns

and similar problems. Make sure that the latches and buckles

operate correctly. If a seat belt is not in good condition or is not

working correctly, consult your Aston Martin Dealer.

Any seat belt that has been worn during a serious collision should

be replaced by an Aston Martin Dealer.

To clean the seat belts, use mild soap and water; do not use

bleach, solvents or dyes, as they can weaken the material. Allow

the seat belts to dry thoroughly before use.

Convertible Roof Cleaning

Caution: Do not leave the roof in the lowered (folded)

position for extended periods of vehicle storage. Permanent

damage to the convertible roof fabric may occur including

soiling and fading along folds.

Caution: Do not use automatic vehicle washes. Brushes,

detergents and pressurized water jets may damage the roof

fabric. Do not use power washers. Jets of water may damage

the weather seals and the roof fabric. Do not use spot

cleaners, chemical diluents or any organic cleaners. If in

doubt, contact your Aston Martin Dealer.

To maintain the appearance and condition of the roof fabric the

cleaning recommendations given below should be followed. This

is of particular importance in the case of light coloured roof

fabrics.

Always remove bird droppings as soon as possible. The organic

acids in bird lime can adversely affect the roof fabric.

Carefully vacuum clean the roof fabric to remove any loose

particles. Gently, and evenly, wash the roof fabric using a mild

soap solution and a soft brush.

A hard brush will damage the fabric fibres.

Rinse the roof fabric thoroughly with clean water to remove any

traces of soap. Allow the roof fabric to completely dry before

operating the roof.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 49 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

12.50 Maintenance and Technical Data

Powertrain Specifications

5.2L V12 Engine

All alloy 48 valve twin turbocharged V12 engine featuring:

• Independent quad-variable camshaft timing

• 3 driver selectable powertrain calibrations

•Cylinder deactivation

• Engine stop/start

• Twin water-to-air charge air coolers

Engine Capacity

5204cc

89mm Bore

69.7mm Stroke

Compression Ratio

9.2:1

Firing Order

1 - 7 - 5 - 11 - 3 - 9 - 6 - 12 - 2 - 8 - 4 - 10

Fuel delivery

Multi-point sequential fuel injection

Idle Speed

650 rpm

Ignition

'Coil on Plug' Ignition System

Lubrication

Wet sump pressurized system

Emission Controls

Four oxygen sensors (two per bank) with two catalytic converters

(one per bank)

Evaporative loss purge system

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 50 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Maintenance and Technical Data 12.51

4.0L V8 Engine

All alloy 32 valve twin turbocharged V8 engine featuring:

• Independent quad-variable camshaft timing

• 3 driver selectable powertrain calibrations

•Engine stop/start

• Twin water-to-air charge air coolers

Engine Capacity

3982cc

83mm Bore

92mm Stroke

Compression Ratio

10.5:1

Firing Order

1 - 5 - 4 - 2 - 6 - 3 - 7 - 8

Fuel delivery

Multi-point sequential fuel injection

Idle Speed

800 rpm

Ignition

'Coil on Plug' Ignition System

Lubrication

Wet sump pressurized system

Emission Controls

Four oxygen sensors (two per bank) with four catalytic converters

(two per bank)

Evaporative loss purge system

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 51 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

12.52 Maintenance and Technical Data

Transmission

Touchtronic IV Automatic Transmission

Rear mounted ZF 8HP70 eight-speed automatic gearbox with

'Shift by Wire' gear shift and Stop/Start ignition support.

Front mounted transmission radiator with transmission mounted

heat exchanger and pump.

Drive line

Cast aluminium torque tube with carbon fibre drive shaft.

Final Drive

Limited-slip differential with integrated coolant jacket.

Gear Ratios

1st 4.714

2nd 3.143

3rd 2.106

4th 1.667

5th 1.285

6th 1.000

7th 0.839

8th 0.667

Reverse 3.317

Final 2.703

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 52 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Maintenance and Technical Data 12.53

Performance

V12 Coupe V8 Coupe V8 Volante

Maximum Power 447 kW | 600 Bhp at 6500 rpm 375 kW | 503 Bhp at 6000 rpm 375 kW | 503 Bhp at 6000 rpm

Maximum Engine Speed 7000 rpm 7000 rpm 7000 rpm

Maximum Torque 700 Nm | 516 Lb.ft at 1600 rpm 675 Nm | 498Lb.ft at 2000 rpm 675 Nm | 498Lb.ft at 2000 rpm

Maximum Speed

(Where Permitted)

200 mph | 322 km/h 187 mph | 300 km/h 187 mph | 300 km/h

0-62 mph (100 km/h) 3.9 Seconds 4.0 Seconds 4.1 Seconds

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 53 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

12.54 Maintenance and Technical Data

Dimensions

V12 Coupe V8 Coupe V8 Volante

Front

Effective Headroom 980 mm

38.5 Inches

980 mm

38.5 Inches

980 mm

38.5 Inches

Effective Leg-room 1145 mm

45 Inches

1145 mm

45 Inches

1145 mm

45 Inches

Effective Shoulder-room 1380 mm

54 Inches

1380 mm

54 Inches

1380 mm

54 Inches

Rear

Effective Headroom 635 mm

25 Inches

635 mm

25 Inches

635 mm

25 Inches

Couple Distance

The couple distance is the distance between the hip point for the rear occupant and the hip point for the front seat occupant.

635 mm

25 Inches

635 mm

25 Inches

635 mm

25 Inches

Effective Shoulder-room 1235 mm

48.5 Inches

1235 mm

48.5 Inches

1235 mm

48.5 Inches

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 54 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Maintenance and Technical Data 12.55

Towing

This vehicle is not engineered to tow any form of caravan, boat or trailer. No towing devices are approved to install to this vehicle,

other than a front towing eye to aid recovery of loading of this vehicle onto a transporter.

V12 Coupe V8 Coupe V8 Volante

Vehicle Weights

Kerb Weight 1875 kg

4135 lbs

1765 kg

3895 lbs

1875 kg

4135 lbs

Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) 2290 kg

5050 lbs

2185 kg

4820 lbs

2295 kg

5050 lbs

Luggage Compartment Volume 280 Liters

10 Cu ft

280 Liters

10 Cu ft

280 Liters

10 Cu ft

Luggage Compartment Load

Maximum load, Evenly Distributed

40 kg

90 Lbs

40 kg

90 Lbs

40 kg

90 Lbs

Towing Capacity

This vehicle is not engineered to tow any form of caravan, boat or trailer. No towing devices are approved to install to this vehicle, other than a

front towing eye to aid recovery of loading of this vehicle onto a transporter.

Not Applicable

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 55 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

12.56 Maintenance and Technical Data

External Dimensions

Coupe

All dimensions shown in mm.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 56 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Maintenance and Technical Data 12.57

Volante

All dimensions shown in mm.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 57 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

12.58 Maintenance and Technical Data

Vehicle Recovery

Caution: When the vehicle is moved by transporter make

sure that the vehicle is not strapped down by the suspension

control arms.

Caution: Power braking and power steering are not

available with the engine OFF. Substantially higher brake

pedal pressures and steering effort are required.

Caution: If there is a transmission fault, this vehicle must

be transported.

If the park brake was applied and the vehicle has lost power, the

park brake will not release. Call Aston Martin Assistance or your

local Aston Martin Dealer.

Your vehicle should always be recovered on a vehicle

transporter

and should only be towed for short distances, for

example, if it is causing an obstruction or if it requires winching

onto a transporter.

If moving the vehicle in such a situation:

1. Remove the towing eye from its storage location in the

vehicle tool kit (located in the luggage compartment). Insert

the towing eye carefully through the grill and install to the

exposed female threads (A) until fully engaged against the

vehicle body.

The towing eye has a left hand thread.

Protect vehicle paint work when installing the towing eye.

2. When being towed use the footbrake very gently when

required, to prevent excessive slack in the tow rope.

The recommended method for a recovering vehicle is to have it

transported in a purpose built, covered, vehicle transporter.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 58 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Maintenance and Technical Data 12.59

Parklock

If the vehicle fails to start or has broken down, the automatic

transmission will move into P (Park) to prevent unintended

vehicle movement. The parklock will not release. Call Aston

Martin Assistance.

Jump Start From Another Vehicle

Warning: The donor vehicle must have a 12 volt battery

and a negative (-) earth terminal to make sure that the

correct battery polarity is maintained.

Caution: Apart from vehicle recovery, this vehicle must

not be driven if the vehicle battery is incapable of starting the

engine. In this case the vehicle battery must be replaced.

Caution: If the voltage or earth of the donor vehicle is

different or not known, do not attempt starting in the way

described.

If this vehicle will not start due to a discharged battery, it may be

started, for vehicle recovery, by connecting the battery from

another vehicle (donor) to this vehicle (recipient).

Jump Start Procedure

Caution: Remove rings, metal watch bands and any other

jewellery.

Caution: Set all electrical motors and ancillaries in both

vehicles to OFF.

Caution: Set all lamps to OFF except those needed to

protect vehicles or illuminate the work area.

Recharge time will depend on the initial ‘state of health’ of

the discharged battery.

If the vehicle still will not start, contact your Aston Martin

Dealer.

1. Position the donor vehicle so that the connecting cables

will

reach into the recipient engine bay. Apply the park brake

and leave the engine running.

2. Access the jump start terminal in the recipient engine bay.

3. Remove the cover for the main power fuse bank (1)

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 59 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

12.60 Maintenance and Technical Data

4. Identify the positive (2) and negative (3) jump start points

shown.

5. Connect the positive cable (4) between the positive terminal

of the donor battery and the positive (+) jump point (2) on

the main power feed (3).

6. Connect the negative cable (5) between the negative

terminal of the donor battery and the suspension earth (-)

nut (5).

7. Start the donor vehicle engine and increase the engine

speed and run at about 1500 – 2000 rpm for two minutes

The donor vehicle must be set to OFF. If the donor vehicle is

not set to OFF the recipient vehicle will not start.

8. Set the donor vehicle to OFF.

9. Start the engine of the recipient vehicle.

10. Leave the jump start cables attached and the engines

running for 2 to 3 minutes to allow the battery to charge.

11. Remove the jump start cables, first the negative cable from

both vehicles and then the positive cable from both

vehicles.

Allow the recipient engine to run until the discharged

battery is sufficiently recharged (15 to 20 minutes) to start

the engine without assistance. Set the engine to OFF and

restart the engine. Take the vehicle on a long run to fully

charge the battery.

Contact your Aston Martin Dealer to have the battery

checked or replaced.

Charge time can depend on the battery state of the donor vehicle.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 60 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Maintenance and Technical Data 12.61

Fuel

Fuel Level Warnings

There are two stages of fuel level warning:

1. The first fuel level warnings changes the fuel symbol on the

fuel gauge from white to amber. This means that the vehicle

will now be using its reserve fuel level and should be

refuelled at the nearest fuel station.

2. The second fuel level warning will also show a warning

symbol in the right instrument cluster window and replaces

the Range value. The vehicle is now down to half of its

reserve fuel level and should be refuelled as soon as

possible.

Fuel Filling

The fuel tank filler neck has a restricted opening which will

only accept the fuel supply nozzle of unleaded fuel pumps.

Open the fuel flap by pressing down on the rear edge of the fuel

flap. If the filler flap will not open use the fuel filler flap

emergency release.

The fuel system will not let the fuel tank overfill but there will be

times when the fuel nozzle will shut OFF prematurely. If this

happens only try to fill the fuel tank one more time, continued

attempts will result in fuel spillage. Wait 10 seconds before

removing the refuelling nozzle.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 61 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

12.62 Maintenance and Technical Data

Fuel Filler Bowl

To stop water gathering in the fuel filler bowl and flowing into the

fuel tank, the fuel filler bowl has a pipe to let the water drain from

the bowl. During fuel filling, check and make sure that any debris

which may block the pipe is removed.

Fuel Cut-Off

In the event of a vehicle accident the vehicle electronics will

enter crash mode. Power to the fuel pumps will stop, thereby

reducing fire risk.

Fuel Filler Flap Emergency Release

To manually unlock the fuel filler flap:

• The right side carpet for the luggage compartment (1) must be

moved. Release the two fasteners (2) that attach the carpet

and disconnect the luggage compartment lamp (3). Move the

carpet.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 62 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Maintenance and Technical Data 12.63

• Reach behind the right side deck lid hinge. • Pull the emergency release (ER) tab to unlock the fuel cap.

• Open the fuel flap by pressing down on the rear edge of the

fuel flap.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 63 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

12.64 Maintenance and Technical Data

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 64 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Service A.1

Service

Aston Martin Facilities .................................................. A.2

Vehicle Provenance...................................................... A.3

Pre-delivery Inspection................................................. A.5

Servicing ...................................................................... A.8

Service Record ........................................................... A.12

Replacement of Airbag Units ...................................... A.33

Replacement of Seat Belt Pre-tensioners..................... A.33

Field Service Actions .................................................. A.34

Service Action Recalls................................................. A.35

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 1 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

A.2 Service

Aston Martin Facilities

A full list of Aston Martin Dealers, Authorized Body Repair

Centres and Authorized Service Centres worldwide, can be

found at:

www.astonmartin.com

Every effort is made to make sure that the information given in

the dealer list is accurate and up-to-date. However changes

amongst holders of the Aston Martin franchise can occur. Neither

Aston Martin nor any listed Importer or Dealer shall in any

circumstances be held liable for any inaccuracy, or the

consequences thereof.

To contact Aston Martin directly:

Aston Martin Lagonda Limited

Banbury Road

Gaydon

Warwick

CV35 0DB

England

Telephone:

(+44) (0)1926 644300

Aston Martin Franchise Dealers

Dealers all aim to conform to Aston Martin standards of

excellence in both sales and service. However, all vehicles sold as

Aston Martins are required to meet local legislation requirements.

Should service be required in a country other than that in which

this vehicle was originally purchased, every effort will be made to

meet the owner’s requirements, but the availability of certain

parts may be affected by differences in vehicle and component

specifications.

Aston Martin Dealers are independent traders, they are not the

Company’s Agents, and therefore have no authority to bind the

Company or to enter into any financial or other commitments on

the Company’s behalf.

Only Aston Martin Dealers are authorized to carry out warranty

work.

Aston Martin Authorized Service Centres

A full list of Aston Martin Authorized Service Centres can be

found at: www.astonmartin.com

All Aston Martin Approved Service Centres have been assessed

and audited to Aston Martin standards. Every effort is made to

make sure that the information given in the Aston Martin

Authorized Service Centres list is accurate and up-to-date.

However changes can occur. Neither Aston Martin nor any Aston

Martin Authorized Service Centre shall in any circumstances be

held liable for any inaccuracy, or the consequences thereof

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 2 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Service A.3

Aston Martin Authorized Body Repairers

A full list of Aston Martin Authorized Body Repairers worldwide

can be found at: www.astonmartin.com

All Aston Martin Approved Body Repair centres have been

assessed and audited to Aston Martin Body Repair Centre

standards in either Category A or B.

Category A

Repairs to the bonded aluminium structure and all paint related

and light structural damage.

Category B

All paint related and light structural damage.

Every effort is made to make sure that the information given in

the Aston Martin Authorized Body Repairers list is accurate and

up-to-date. However changes can occur. Neither Aston Martin

nor any Aston Martin Authorized Body Repairer shall in any

circumstances be held liable for any inaccuracy, or the

consequences thereof.

Vehicle Provenance

Model:

Vehicle Identification Number:

As on the VIN plate

Body Colour:

Interior Primary Colour:

Interior Secondary Colour:

Stitch Colour:

Fascia Colour:

Jewellery Pack Colour:

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 3 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

A.4 Service

First Owner

Selling Dealer

Delivery Date

Second Owner

Selling Dealer

Delivery Date

Third Owner

Selling Dealer

Delivery Date

Fourth Owner

Selling Dealer

Delivery Date

Fifth Owner

Selling Dealer

Delivery Date

Sixth Owner

Selling Dealer

Delivery Date

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 4 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Service A.5

Pre-delivery Inspection

This free series of checks is carried out on the vehicle by the

Selling Dealer before delivery. The checks make sure that you

receive a vehicle which matches the high quality standards set by

Aston Martin Limited.

The list below applies to all Aston Martin vehicles. Your Aston

Martin may or may not have all or some of the functionality listed.

Make sure that the entry is stamped and signed as completed.

The following checks will be made:

Levels and Leaks

•Engine oil

•Brake fluid

• Engine coolant level

• Engine coolant specific gravity

• Windscreen washer fluid

•Fuel system

• Transmission leak check

•Battery

Mechanical Functions

•Gear selection

• Throttle pedal operation

• Park brake operation

• Steering column adjustment and lock operation

• Seat adjuster rails

• Hood release and catches

• Door operation and locks

• Storage compartments

• Rear view mirror

• Deck lid release and catch

• Seat belt operation.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 5 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

A.6 Service

Electrical Checks

• Battery condition

•Gear selection

• Heated rear window

• Windscreen washers

•Windscreen wipers

• Climate control

• Infotainment centre operation

•All speakers

• Reversing, registration plate and brake lamps

• Side and headlamps

• Rear fog lamps

• Hazard warning lamps

• Instrument illumination and dimmer

• Gauges and warning symbols

• Centre stack controls

•Horns

• Reset clock

•Blower motor

•Seat belt warning system

• Security system and vehicle key

•Interior lamps

• All seat functions

•Door window mechanisms

• Door and luggage compartment lamps

• Central locking system

• Filler flap lock operation

• Door mirror adjustments

• Interrogate fault codes

• Record battery open-circuit voltage

• Tire pressure sensing

• Cigar lighter (Option)

Wheels and Tires

• Install locking road wheel nuts (option)

• Check road wheel nuts torque

• Tire pressures

• Tire orientation.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 6 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Service A.7

Road Test

•Engine

•Transmission

• Gear shift operation

•Steering

•Brakes

• Wheel balance

•Dampers

• Exhaust by-pass system

• Noise, vibration or harshness

• Climate control performance

• Instrument operation

• Seat belt and buckle operation

• Steering wheel alignment

• Dynamic stability control, traction control, adaptive damping

and anti-lock braking system operation

• Transmission oil cooler.

Final Checks

• Drive belt tensioner operation

• Fuel and brake pipe security

• Fuel and fluid leaks

• Security of cooling hoses

• Exhaust catalyst security.

Hand-over Preparation

• Check function of locks and vehicle keys

• Clean bodywork and road wheel arch liners.

• Clean off all transit labels

•Valet vehicle

• De-grease windscreen

• Install carpets

• Remove interior protection

• Check owner's handbook

• Check tools

• Install registration plates

• Tire sealant kit

•Towing eye

• Battery conditioner (option)

• Field service actions and recall status.

Free Pre-delivery Inspection

Service Actions Checked:

Open Service Actions Completed:

Signature:

Date:

Yes / No

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 7 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

A.8 Service

Servicing

Service Periods

Vehicle servicing is every 10,000 miles, 16,000 km or 12 months,

which ever occurs first.

• 10,000 miles, 16,000 km or 12 months

• 20,000 miles, 32,000 km or 24 months

• 30,000 miles, 48,000 km or 36 months

Service Tables

The following service schedules are recommended for this

vehicle. The schedules may be modified if necessary. Please

consult your Aston Martin Dealer for details of any service

schedule updates.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 8 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Service A.9

16,000 km /

10,000 miles /

12 months

32,000 km /

20,000 miles /

24 months

Item

Pre Maintenance Work

Install the vehicle protection kit.

Check the Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs).

Under Body

x x Examine the condition, operation and attachment of the engine, transmission mounting system and check

for leaks.

x x Examine the condition, operation and attachment of the exhaust system, heat shields, bypass valve

operation and check for leaks.

x x Examine the condition, operation and attachment of the suspension and steering system for wear.

Examine for leaks.

x x Examine the condition, operation and attachment of the braking system for wear and adjustment.

Examine for leaks.

x x Examine the condition, operation and attachment of the park brake system for wear and adjustment.

x x Examine the condition, operation and attachment of the drive shafts.

x x Examine the condition, operation and attachment of the wheel arch liners and under body protection.

x x Examine the condition, operation and attachment of the cooling pack assembly. Examine for leaks.

x x Examine the condition, operation and attachment of all under body fluid pipes and hoses and check for

leaks.

5 Years Replace engine coolant.

x Automatic Transmission: Check and adjust the oil level in the differential.

60,000 mls/96,000 km Automatic Transmission: Replace the oil and clean the filter in the differential.

x x Replace the brake fluid.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 9 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

A.10 Service

16,000 km /

10,000 miles /

12 months

32,000 km /

20,000 miles /

24 months

Item

Upper Body

x x Replace the engine oil.

x x Replace the engine oil filter.

20,000 mls/32,000 km Replace the pollen filter and air filter (optional).

x x Examine the condition, operation and attachment of the accessory drive belt.

x x Examine the condition, operation and attachment of the brake system. Examine for leaks.

x x Examine the condition, operation and attachment of the fuel system. Examine for leaks.

x x Examine the condition, operation and attachment of the air conditioning system. Examine for leaks..

x x Check all braking system fluid levels and adjust accordingly. Check for leaks.

x x Check all cooling system fluid levels and adjust accordingly. Check for leaks.

x x Check all screen and headlight wash system fluid levels and adjust accordingly. Check for leaks.

60,000 mls/96,000 km Replace the oil and clean the filter in the automatic differential.

70,000 mls/112,000 km Replace the spark plugs.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 10 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Service A.11

16,000 km /

10,000 miles /

12 months

32,000 km /

20,000 miles /

24 months

Item

General

x x Examine the condition, operation and attachment of all the occupant restraint systems.

x x Examine the condition, operation and attachment of all the door locks, latches, hinges, hoodhood

catches. Lubricate if necessary.

x x Examine the condition, operation and attachment of the wiper blades and wash system including

headlights.

x x Examine the condition, operation and attachment of all the light units and the horn.

x x Examine the condition of the road wheels. Check the wheel nut torque is correct.

x x Complete the tire report. If necessary, adjust the tire pressures.

x x Complete the functional test of the tire pressure sensor system.

x x Reset the service interval indicator.

Road Test

x x Check the powertrain system for excessive noise, vibration and harshness.

x x Check the braking system for excessive noise, vibration and harshness.

x x Check the suspension system for excessive noise, vibration and harshness.

x x Check the steering system for excessive noise, vibration and harshness.

x x Check the wheels and tires for excessive noise, vibration and harshness.

x x Check the cabin environment for excessive noise, vibration and harshness.

x x Check the driver information and warning system operation.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 11 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

A.12 Service

Service Record

The following service records cover the regular services at 10,000 miles, 16,000 km or 12 months intervals, which ever occurs first.

Make sure that at each service the appropriate entry is stamped and signed as completed.

Vehicle Model:

_______________________________

Registration Number:

_______________________________

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN):

_______________________________

Delivery Date:

_______________________________

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 12 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Service A.13

10,000 Miles/16,000 km/1st Year

Odometer:

Technician Name:

Date:

Next Service Due:

Service Details

Service Actions Checked:

Air Filter Changed:

Pollen Filter Changed:

Spark Plugs Changed:

Anti Corrosion Inspection:

Fluids Changed:

Yes / No

Authorized Dealer Stamp

Service Advisor Name:

Service Advisor Signature:

Additional Service Information

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 13 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

A.14 Service

20,000 Miles/32,000 km/2nd Year

Odometer:

Technician Name:

Date:

Next Service Due:

Service Details

Service Actions Checked:

Air Filter Changed:

Pollen Filter Changed:

Spark Plugs Changed:

Anti Corrosion Inspection:

Fluids Changed:

Yes / No

Authorized Dealer Stamp

Service Advisor Name:

Service Advisor Signature:

Additional Service Information

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 14 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Service A.15

30,000 Miles/48,000 km/3rd Year

Odometer:

Technician Name:

Date:

Next Service Due:

Service Details

Service Actions Checked:

Air Filter Changed:

Pollen Filter Changed:

Spark Plugs Changed:

Anti Corrosion Inspection:

Fluids Changed:

Yes / No

Authorized Dealer Stamp

Service Advisor Name:

Service Advisor Signature:

Additional Service Information

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 15 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

A.16 Service

40,000 Miles/64,000 km/4th Year

Odometer:

Technician Name:

Date:

Next Service Due:

Service Details

Service Actions Checked:

Air Filter Changed:

Pollen Filter Changed:

Spark Plugs Changed:

Anti Corrosion Inspection:

Fluids Changed:

Yes / No

Authorized Dealer Stamp

Service Advisor Name:

Service Advisor Signature:

Additional Service Information

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 16 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Service A.17

50,000 Miles/80,000 km/5th Year

Odometer:

Technician Name:

Date:

Next Service Due:

Service Details

Service Actions Checked:

Air Filter Changed:

Pollen Filter Changed:

Spark Plugs Changed:

Anti Corrosion Inspection:

Fluids Changed:

Yes / No

Authorized Dealer Stamp

Service Advisor Name:

Service Advisor Signature:

Additional Service Information

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 17 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

A.18 Service

60,000 Miles/96,000/6th Year

Odometer:

Technician Name:

Date:

Next Service Due:

Service Details

Service Actions Checked:

Air Filter Changed:

Pollen Filter Changed:

Spark Plugs Changed:

Anti Corrosion Inspection:

Fluids Changed:

Yes / No

Authorized Dealer Stamp

Service Advisor Name:

Service Advisor Signature:

Additional Service Information

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 18 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Service A.19

70,000 Miles/112,000 km/7th Year

Odometer:

Technician Name:

Date:

Next Service Due:

Service Details

Service Actions Checked:

Air Filter Changed:

Pollen Filter Changed:

Spark Plugs Changed:

Anti Corrosion Inspection:

Fluids Changed:

Yes / No

Authorized Dealer Stamp

Service Advisor Name:

Service Advisor Signature:

Additional Service Information

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 19 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

A.20 Service

80,000 Miles/128,000 km/8th Year

Odometer:

Technician Name:

Date:

Next Service Due:

Service Details

Service Actions Checked:

Air Filter Changed:

Pollen Filter Changed:

Spark Plugs Changed:

Anti Corrosion Inspection:

Fluids Changed:

Yes / No

Authorized Dealer Stamp

Service Advisor Name:

Service Advisor Signature:

Additional Service Information

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 20 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Service A.21

90,000 Miles/144,000 km/9th Year

Odometer:

Technician Name:

Date:

Next Service Due:

Service Details

Service Actions Checked:

Air Filter Changed:

Pollen Filter Changed:

Spark Plugs Changed:

Anti Corrosion Inspection:

Fluids Changed:

Yes / No

Authorized Dealer Stamp

Service Advisor Name:

Service Advisor Signature:

Additional Service Information

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 21 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

A.22 Service

100,000 Miles/160,000 km/10th Year

Odometer:

Technician Name:

Date:

Next Service Due:

Service Details

Service Actions Checked:

Air Filter Changed:

Pollen Filter Changed:

Spark Plugs Changed:

Anti Corrosion Inspection:

Fluids Changed:

Yes / No

Authorized Dealer Stamp

Service Advisor Name:

Service Advisor Signature:

Additional Service Information

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 22 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Service A.23

110,000 Miles/176,000 km/11th Year

Odometer:

Technician Name:

Date:

Next Service Due:

Service Details

Service Actions Checked:

Air Filter Changed:

Pollen Filter Changed:

Spark Plugs Changed:

Anti Corrosion Inspection:

Fluids Changed:

Yes / No

Authorized Dealer Stamp

Service Advisor Name:

Service Advisor Signature:

Additional Service Information

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 23 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

A.24 Service

120,000 Miles/192,000 km/12th Year

Odometer:

Technician Name:

Date:

Next Service Due:

Service Details

Service Actions Checked:

Air Filter Changed:

Pollen Filter Changed:

Spark Plugs Changed:

Anti Corrosion Inspection:

Fluids Changed:

Yes / No

Authorized Dealer Stamp

Service Advisor Name:

Service Advisor Signature:

Additional Service Information

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 24 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Service A.25

130,000 Miles/208,000 km/13th Year

Odometer:

Technician Name:

Date:

Next Service Due:

Service Details

Service Actions Checked:

Air Filter Changed:

Pollen Filter Changed:

Spark Plugs Changed:

Anti Corrosion Inspection:

Fluids Changed:

Yes / No

Authorized Dealer Stamp

Service Advisor Name:

Service Advisor Signature:

Additional Service Information

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 25 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

A.26 Service

140,000 Miles/224,000 km/14th Year

Odometer:

Technician Name:

Date:

Next Service Due:

Service Details

Service Actions Checked:

Air Filter Changed:

Pollen Filter Changed:

Spark Plugs Changed:

Anti Corrosion Inspection:

Fluids Changed:

Yes / No

Authorized Dealer Stamp

Service Advisor Name:

Service Advisor Signature:

Additional Service Information

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 26 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Service A.27

150,000 Miles/240,000 km/15th Year

Odometer:

Technician Name:

Date:

Next Service Due:

Service Details

Service Actions Checked:

Air Filter Changed:

Pollen Filter Changed:

Spark Plugs Changed:

Anti Corrosion Inspection:

Fluids Changed:

Yes / No

Authorized Dealer Stamp

Service Advisor Name:

Service Advisor Signature:

Additional Service Information

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 27 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

A.28 Service

160,000 Miles/256,000 km/16th Year

Odometer:

Technician Name:

Date:

Next Service Due:

Service Details

Service Actions Checked:

Air Filter Changed:

Pollen Filter Changed:

Spark Plugs Changed:

Anti Corrosion Inspection:

Fluids Changed:

Yes / No

Authorized Dealer Stamp

Service Advisor Name:

Service Advisor Signature:

Additional Service Information

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 28 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Service A.29

170,000 Miles/272,000 km/17th Year

Odometer:

Technician Name:

Date:

Next Service Due:

Service Details

Service Actions Checked:

Air Filter Changed:

Pollen Filter Changed:

Spark Plugs Changed:

Anti Corrosion Inspection:

Fluids Changed:

Yes / No

Authorized Dealer Stamp

Service Advisor Name:

Service Advisor Signature:

Additional Service Information

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 29 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

A.30 Service

180,000 Miles/288,000 km/18th Year

Odometer:

Technician Name:

Date:

Next Service Due:

Service Details

Service Actions Checked:

Air Filter Changed:

Pollen Filter Changed:

Spark Plugs Changed:

Anti Corrosion Inspection:

Fluids Changed:

Yes / No

Authorized Dealer Stamp

Service Advisor Name:

Service Advisor Signature:

Additional Service Information

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 30 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Service A.31

190,000 Miles/304,000 km/19th Year

Odometer:

Technician Name:

Date:

Next Service Due:

Service Details

Service Actions Checked:

Air Filter Changed:

Pollen Filter Changed:

Spark Plugs Changed:

Anti Corrosion Inspection:

Fluids Changed:

Yes / No

Authorized Dealer Stamp

Service Advisor Name:

Service Advisor Signature:

Additional Service Information

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 31 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

A.32 Service

200,000 Miles/320,000 km/20 Year

Odometer:

Technician Name:

Date:

Next Service Due:

Service Details

Service Actions Checked:

Air Filter Changed:

Pollen Filter Changed:

Spark Plugs Changed:

Anti Corrosion Inspection:

Fluids Changed:

Yes / No

Authorized Dealer Stamp

Service Advisor Name:

Service Advisor Signature:

Additional Service Information

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 32 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Service A.33

Replacement of Airbag Units

Aston Martin recommend that all airbag units are replaced every

10 years from the date of manufacture. To make sure this is

completed correctly and safely, this work should be carried out

by your Aston Martin Dealership.

Replacement of Seat Belt Pre-tensioners

Aston Martin recommend that all seat belt pre-tensioners units

are replaced every 10 years from the date of manufacture. To

make sure this is completed correctly and safely, this work should

be carried out by your Aston Martin Dealership.

Airbag Replacement 10th Year

Odometer:

Date:

Signature:

Airbag Replacement 20th Year

Odometer:

Date:

Signature:

Seat Belt Pre-Tensioners Replacement 10th Year

Odometer:

Date:

Signature:

Seat Belt Pre-Tensioners Replacement 20th Year

Odometer:

Date:

Signature:

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 33 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

A.34 Service

Field Service Actions

Action No. Date Dealer Action No. Date Dealer

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 34 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Service A.35

Service Action Recalls

Action No. Date Dealer Recall No. Date Dealer

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 35 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

A.36 Service

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 36 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Aston Martin Warranty

1 Aston Martin Warranties............................................ B.2

2 New Vehicle Limited Warranty.................................. B.4

3 New Vehicle Limited Warranty Statement................. B.5

4 What is not Covered under the Warranties................ B.6

5 Customer Satisfaction Campaigns ............................ B.10

6 Anti-Perforation Corrosion Warranty ....................... B.10

7 Emissions Defect Warranty...................................... B.11

8 Emissions Performance Warranty............................. B.11

9 California Emissions Warranties ............................... B.14

10 How do I get Service under the Emissions WarrantiesB.18

11 How do I handle Emergency Repairs to make sure they do not

affect the Emissions Warranties................................... B.18

12 What Replacement Parts should I use.................... B.19

13 Preserve Your Emissions Warranty ......................... B.20

14 Customer Satisfaction ............................................ B.20

15 The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto Line ProgramB.21

16 State Warranty Enforcement Laws ......................... B.23

17 Aston Martin Extended Service Contract................ B.23

Owner And Vehicle Details ........................................ B.24

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 1 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

B.2 Aston Martin Warranty

1 Aston Martin Warranties

This chapter contains information essential for the understanding

of the Aston Martin warranties and for the implementation of any

necessary Warranty rectification. It is recommended that you

read this chapter carefully to familiarize yourself with the benefits

available under the various warranties.

1.1 Warranty Communications

Any communications regarding Warranty should initially be

addressed to your Aston Martin Dealer. If necessary, you may

communicate with Aston Martin at the appropriate address

listed.

National After Sales Manager,

Aston Martin Lagonda of North America Inc.

9920 Irvine Centre Drive,

Irvine,

CA 92618

Or:

Warranty Department

Aston Martin Lagonda Limited,

Banbury Road,

Gaydon,

Warwick,

CV35 0DB,

England

1.2 Warranties

All Aston Martin warranties are issued by Aston Martin Lagonda

Limited on behalf of Aston Martin Lagonda of North America

Inc., the sole authorized United States agent of Aston Martin

vehicles.

The warranties provided herein are for the benefit of the original

purchaser and any subsequent owner during the relevant

Warranty Period (defined below) in the Serviced Countries

(defined below).

An Aston Martin vehicle is built and homologated to support the

Region for which it is manufactured and is compliant with the

local regulatory requirements of that Region. As a result, the

warranties cover Aston Martin vehicles that are built for and

supplied to the Region.

For the purposes of this Owner’s Guide, 'Region means one of

the following territories:

• the Americas, including the United States, Canada, and South

America; or

• the United Kingdom, Europe, Russia and South Africa; or

• the Middle East, North Africa and India; or

• Asia Pacific, including China, Japan, Taiwan, Hong Kong,

Singapore, Australia and New Zealand.

'Serviced Countries' means either: (a) any country in the Region

from which your Aston Martin vehicle was purchased, where

there is an Aston Martin authorized dealer or repairer; or (b) any

country agreed in writing with Aston Martin.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 2 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Aston Martin Warranty B.3

The warranties provided herein are for the benefit of the original

purchaser and any subsequent owner during the relevant

Warranty Period (defined below). The warranties cover Aston

Martin vehicles that are built for and supplied to the Region.

The Warranty period for all Warranties (defined below) for

vehicles begin on the date of first retail sale, or on the date of

entry into demonstrator service, whichever comes first.

A summary of all Aston Martin warranties applicable to this

vehicle (together the Warranties) are as follows:

a) New Vehicle Limited Warranty

Bumper to bumper: Three years, unlimited mileage.

b) Vehicle Anti-Perforation Corrosion Warranty

Period of cover: Ten years, unlimited mileage.

c) Vehicle Emission Warranties (Federal)

Emissions Defects Warranty: Three years or 36,000 miles of

vehicle use.

Certain emission parts:

Eight years or 80,000 miles of vehicle

use.

Emissions Performance Warranty: Two years or 24,000 miles of

vehicle use.

d) Vehicle Emission Warranties (Californian Vehicles)

Emissions Defect Warranty (Short Term): Three years or 50,000

miles of vehicle use.

Emissions Defect Warranty (Long Term):

Seven years or 70,000

miles of vehicle use.

Emissions Performance Warranty: Three years or 50,000 miles of

vehicle use.

Catalytic convertor, the electronic emissions control unit and / or the

on-board emissions diagnostic device (required eight years or 80,000

miles (129,000 km) coverage per Clean Air Act).

These specific parts were selected on the basis of their estimated

replacement cost at the time your vehicle was certified by the California

Air Resources Board (CARB) for sale in California.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 3 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

B.4 Aston Martin Warranty

1.3 Changes to Vehicles

Aston Martin and its authorized dealers (the ‘Dealers’) reserve

the right to make changes in or additions to vehicles built or sold

by them at any time without incurring any obligation to make the

same or similar changes or additions to vehicles previously built

or sold.

1.4 Reservation of Rights

Aston Martin and its Dealers reserve the right to provide post-

Warranty repairs, conduct recalls, or extend the Warranty

coverage period for certain vehicles or vehicle populations, at

Aston Martin’s sole discretion. The fact that Aston Martin

provided such measures to a particular vehicle or vehicle

population, does not in any way obligate Aston Martin to provide

similar accommodations to other owners of similar vehicles.

1.5 Condition

As a fundamental condition of the Warranties, you are

responsible for correctly using, maintaining and caring for your

vehicle in accordance with the Aston Martin Owner’s Guide (the

‘Owner’s Guide’). Aston Martin recommends that you maintain

copies of all maintenance records and receipts for review by

Aston Martin.

2 New Vehicle Limited Warranty

2.1 Warranty Limitations

This New Vehicle Limited Warranty is the only express Warranty

applicable to your vehicle. Aston Martin neither assumes, nor

authorizes anyone to assume for it, any other obligation or

liability in connection with this Warranty. No person, including

Aston Martin employees or Dealers, can modify or waive any part

of this Warranty.

a) Limitation of Remedies

Under this Warranty, it is agreed that the sole exclusive remedy

against Aston Martin and its authorized Dealers shall be for the

repair or replacement of defective parts as provided herein. The

sole purpose of this exclusive remedy shall be to provide for the

free repair and replacement of defective parts in the manner

prescribed in this Warranty.

This exclusive remedy shall not be deemed to have failed its

essential purpose so long as Aston Martin, through its authorized

Dealers, is willing and able to repair or replace defective parts in

the prescribed manner.

Aston Martin and its Dealers are not responsible to you for any

time or income that you lose, any inconvenience you might be

caused, the loss of your transportation or use of your vehicle, the

cost of rental vehicles, fuel, telephone, travel, meals or lodging,

the loss of personal or commercial property, the loss of revenue,

or for any other incidental or consequential damages you may

have.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 4 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Aston Martin Warranty B.5

Punitive, exemplary, or multiple damages can not be recovered

unless applicable law prohibits their disclaimer. You may not

bring any warranty-related claim as a class representative, a

private attorney general, a member of a class of claimants or in

any other representative capacity.

Aston Martin shall not be liable for any damages caused by delay

in delivery or furnishing of any products and /or services.

b) Implied Warranties and Consequential Damages

Under the law of some States, you as the owner may be entitled

to the benefit of the implied warranties of merchantability or

fitness for intended purpose. These implied warranties are

limited to the extent allowed by law to the time period covered

by the written warranties, or the applicable time period provided

by State Law, whichever period is shorter.

Some States do not permit a limitation on how long an implied

warranty will last, or on the exclusion or limitation of incidental

or consequential damages, so the above limitation may not apply

to you. This warranty gives owners specific legal rights, and they

may also have other rights that vary from State to State.

3 New Vehicle Limited Warranty Statement

3.1 Warranty Maintenance

Aston Martin warrants that during the Warranty period, if an

Aston Martin vehicle is correctly operated and maintained by the

user in accordance with the Maintenance chapter of the Owner’s

Guide, repairs required to correct defects in materials or

workmanship will be performed without charge; any component

covered by this Warranty found to be defective in materials or

workmanship, will be repaired, or replaced, without charge. Your

Aston Martin Dealer will repair the vehicle with genuine

approved Aston Martin parts.

3.2 Warranty Coverage

The New Vehicle Limited Warranty covers any original or OEM

component of the Aston Martin vehicle that is defective during

the basic Warranty period, with the exception of tires, the items

listed under section 4.4, normal maintenance items and regularly

scheduled maintenance parts and labor. The Warranty includes

any part scheduled for routine replacement during the Warranty

period only if it is defective. If a part fails at the same time it is due

for replacement it is not covered by the Warranty.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 5 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

B.6 Aston Martin Warranty

4 What is not Covered under the Warranties

4.1 Excluded Categories of Vehicle

The following categories of vehicle are excluded from the

provisions of the Warranties:

• Vehicles sold for hire.

• Vehicles used for motor sport, competition and track events

(except Aston Martin organized and managed events).

• Vehicles that are incorrectly maintained.

4.2 Damage Caused by Accident, Alteration or Misuse

The Warranties do not cover:

• Damage caused by collision, fire, flood, theft, freezing,

vandalism, riot, explosion, or objects striking the vehicle.

• Misuse of the vehicle, such as driving over curbs, overloading,

racing, or using the vehicle as a stationary power source.

• Alterations or modifications of the vehicle (including changes

to the body, chassis, or components) carried out on the

vehicle, at any time during its lifetime, by non-approved

repairers or body repair centres and shops, tampering with

the vehicle, tampering with the emission systems or with

other parts that affect these systems.

• Disconnection or alteration of the odometer, or where the

actual mileage cannot be determined due to the odometer

being inoperative for an extended period of time.

• Use of contaminated or incorrect fuel or fluids or application

of unauthorized chemicals by the customer.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 6 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Aston Martin Warranty B.7

4.3 Damage Caused by Use or the Environment

Surface rust, deterioration and damage of paint, trim, upholstery

and other appearance items that result from use and / or

exposure to the elements are not covered under any of the

Warranties.

The Warranties do not cover:

• Stone chips, scratches

• Lightning, hail damage

•Dints or dents

• Windstorm damage

• Road salt, tree sap

• Earthquake damage

• Bird and insect droppings

• Freezing, water or flood damage

• Cuts, burns, punctures or tears

•Windshield stress cracks

•Rodent damage

• Incorrect polishing of paint surface.

4.4 Damage Caused by Failure to Maintain or Incorrect

Maintenance

Damage caused by failure to maintain the vehicle, incorrect

maintenance of the vehicle, or using the wrong fuel, oil,

lubricants, or fluids is not covered under the Warranties. Refer to

the Specifications chapter of the Owner’s Guide for correct fluid

levels, and for information on the correct ways to maintain your

vehicle.

Examples of important maintenance procedures that need to be

done correctly are:

•Oil changes

• Cleaning and polishing

• Oils, lubricants and other fluids

• Engine tune-up

• Oil and air filters

• Wiper blades

• Brake pads and lining

• Tire rotation, inflation

• Clutch linings

• Wheel alignments and tire balancing.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 7 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

B.8 Aston Martin Warranty

4.5 Other Items and Conditions Not Covered by the

Warranties

The Warranties do not cover:

• The installation or use of a non-Aston Martin part (other than

a certified emissions part) or any part (Aston Martin or non-

Aston Martin) designed for off-road use only installed after the

vehicle leaves the control of Aston Martin, if the installed part

fails or causes an Aston Martin part to fail.

• Damage to, or caused by, non-approved accessories such as

alarms, telephones.

• Damage to, or caused by, non-approved snow chains or

towing devices.

• Damage caused by failure to maintain adequate levels of fuel

in your vehicle.

• Vehicles that have been labeled or branded as being

‘dismantled’, ‘fire’, ‘flood’, ‘junk’, ‘rebuilt’, ‘reconstructed’,

‘salvaged’ – this will void the Warranties.

• Vehicles that have been determined as a ‘total loss’ by an

insurance company, or other official body – this will void the

Warranties.

• Service adjustments, wear items and alignments after one (1)

year or 10,000 miles, whichever occurs first.

• Use of alternative fuels: Aston Martin does not recommend or

approve of the use of Liquid Petroleum gas or Compressed

Natural gas. Damage caused by the use of alternative fuels or

fuel additives is not covered by the vehicle warranty.

• Normal wear or worn out tires. Tires will not be replaced

(unless required by a warranty repair) for wear or damage

including a) tire damage from road hazard such as cuts, snags,

bruises, bulges, puncture, and impact breaks; and b) tire

damage due to under or over inflation, tire chain use, racing,

spinning (including when stuck in snow or mud), incorrect

mounting or dismounting, or tire repair.

• Vehicles that have had the odometer disconnected, altered,

or inoperative for an extended period of time with the result

that the actual mileage cannot be determined.

• Use of a fuel not approved or recommended by Aston Martin

in the Owner's Guide is considered misfuelling, and that any

damage resulting from misfuelling is not covered by the

vehicle warranty.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 8 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Aston Martin Warranty B.9

4.6 Wear and Tear Items

Items that are subject to wear and tear are generally divided into

two categories, namely those specified for replacement or

adjustment during scheduled maintenance and those that

require replacement or adjustment dependent upon conditions

of use.

a) Scheduled Maintenance Items

The items listed below are covered by the Vehicle Warranty up

to the first scheduled change point that replacement or

adjustment is required during scheduled maintenance

operations.

• Drive belts

• Spark plugs

• Oil, air, pollen and fuel filters.

The period of warranty cover for any item may not exceed the

time and distance limitation of the vehicle warranty.

b) Other Items

The items listed below are recognized as having a limited service

life or are subject to wear or damage. However, these items are

covered by the vehicle warranty for up to one year or the first

service, which ever occurs first.

• Wiper blades

• All light bulbs

Xenon headlamp light bulbs and instrumentation light bulbs

are covered by the full vehicle warranty.

• Wheel alignment and balancing

• Adjustments, including but not limited to: headlamp and

hinged panel adjustments, suspension tightening, steering

geometry adjustments, emission and fuel systems checks and

parking brake cable adjustments.

• Remote transmitter batteries.

Brake pads, brake rotors and other friction related

components are not covered when replacement is due to wear

and tear, but they are covered against manufacturing defects for

the duration of the Vehicle Warranty.

c) Consumables

Replacement or ‘top-up’ of consumable fluids, e.g. oils, anti-

freeze, brake fluid, windshield wash solution and refrigerant, is

only covered when they are used as part of a warranty repair.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 9 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

B.10 Aston Martin Warranty

5 Customer Satisfaction Campaigns

In order to maintain a high level of customer confidence and

satisfaction with Aston Martin products, Aston Martin may

periodically determine that certain service procedures are

necessary, and will assume costs for same, in whole or in part,

independent of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. When

repairs to your vehicle are covered by the terms of one of these

policy adjustments, your Aston Martin Dealer will advise you of

the extent to which Aston Martin will pay either for parts, or for

labor, or both.

If you have a question regarding a possible extra-Warranty

adjustment, an authorized Aston Martin Dealer or Aston Martin

can provide the details when the year, model and Vehicle

Identification Number (VIN) are supplied.

Aston Martin reserves the right to make modifications in vehicles

manufactured or sold by them at any time without incurring any

obligation to make the same or similar modifications in vehicles

previously manufactured or sold by them.

6 Anti-Perforation Corrosion Warranty

The vehicle bodywork is protected by an Anti-Perforation

Corrosion Warranty. Should any part of the bodywork of the

Aston Martin vehicle be perforated the panel(s) affected by the

perforation will be repaired or replaced. The term ‘perforation’

means a hole that penetrates from the inner surface of a body

panel or box section outwards. A pre-condition of supporting this

Warranty is an annual Dealer inspection.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 10 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Aston Martin Warranty B.11

7 Emissions Defect Warranty

7.1 Federal Requirements

Aston Martin provides coverage under the Emissions Defect

Warranty (including labor and diagnosis) for repairs of emissions

related parts which become defective on vehicles with the

following years of service or mileage (whichever occurs first):

During the Warranty coverage period, Aston Martin warrants

that:

• Your vehicle or engine is designed, built and equipped to

meet (at the time it is sold) the applicable emissions

regulations of the US Environmental Protection Agency (EPA).

• Your vehicle or engine is free from defects in factory-supplied

Materials or workmanship that could prevent it from

conforming with applicable EPA regulations.

• You will not be charged for repair, replacement, or

adjustment of defective Emissions Related Parts (defined

under section 8.2, What is Covered).

8 Emissions Performance Warranty

8.1 Federal Requirements

If your vehicle is registered in a State where the State or Local

Government has an EPA - approved inspection and maintenance

program, any repairs which are required on your vehicle may also

be covered under the Emissions Performance Warranty if your

vehicle has the following years service or mileage (whichever

occurs first) and if you meet certain conditions noted below:

Parts Years in Service Mileage

Emissions Related Parts 3 36,000

Certain Emissions Parts

Means the catalytic converter, the engine control module, the

transmission control module and / or the on-board emissions diagnostic

device.

8 80,000

Parts Years in Service Mileage

Emissions Related Parts 2 24,000

Certain Emissions Parts

Means the catalytic converter, the engine control module, the

transmission control module and / or the on-board emissions diagnostic

device.

8 80,000

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 11 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

B.12 Aston Martin Warranty

Under the Emissions Performance Warranty, Aston Martin will

repair, replace, or adjust (with no charge for labor, diagnosis, or

parts) any emissions control device or system, if you meet all of

the following conditions:

• You have maintained and operated your vehicle according to

the instructions on correct care and scheduled maintenance

contained in the Owner’s Guide.

• Your vehicle fails to conform, during the warranty coverage

period to the applicable national EPA standards, as

determined by an EPA approved inspection and maintenance

program.

• You are subject to a penalty or sanction under local, State or

Federal Law because your vehicle has failed to conform to the

emissions standards (a penalty or sanction includes being

denied the right to use your vehicle).

• Your vehicle has not been tampered with, misused, or

abused.

The Emissions Performance Warranty will not apply to your

vehicle if the diagnosis on your vehicle shows your vehicle will

pass the applicable State or Local Government test using test

procedures and standards set by the EPA.

8.2 What is Covered

If the following parts contain an emissions- related defect (an

‘Emissions Related Part’) they will be covered by both the

Emissions Defect Warranty (set out in section 7) and the

Emissions Performance Warranty:

• Air and Fuel Feedback Control System and Sensor

• Air Filter Housing

• Altitude Compensation System

• Camshaft Position Sensor

• Catalytic Converter

• Charge Air Cooler

• Controls for Deceleration

• Electronic Ignition System

• Electronic Engine Control Sensors and Switches

• Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve, Spacer, Plate and

Associated Parts

• Exhaust Heat Control Valve

• Exhaust Manifold and Gasket

• Fuel Delivery Module

• Fuel Filter

• Fuel Injector

• Fuel Pressure Temperature Sensor

• Fuel Rail Assembly

•Fuel Tank

• Fuel Vapour Storage Canister, Liquid Separator and

Associated Controls

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 12 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Aston Martin Warranty B.13

• Ignition Coil and / or Control Module

• Intake Manifold (Includes Boost Air Distribution Lines)

• Instrument Cluster (Malfunction Indicator Lamp)

• PCV System and Oil Filler Cap

• Engine Control Module

• Transmission Control Module

• Pulsed Secondary Air Injection Valve / Secondary Air Injection

Pump and Associated Parts

• Spark Control Components

• Spark Plugs

• Throttle Air Control By-pass Valve

• Throttle Body Assembly

• Turbocharger

• Volume Air Flow Sensor.

Some items and equipment in this list may not be installed to

this vehicle and therefore may not be applicable.

Also covered by the Emissions Defect Warranty and the Emissions

Performance Warranty are all emissions-related bulbs, hoses,

clamps, brackets, tubes, gaskets, seals, belts, connectors, and

wiring harnesses that are used with components in the list of parts

set out above.

8.3 Parts Replaced on Regular Maintenance Schedules

Parts that should be replaced on a certain recommended

maintenance schedule, remain under warranty until, (a) the first

replacement time that is specified under Service in your Owner’s

Guide or, (b) the time or mileage limits of the Federal Defect and

Performance Warranties (whichever occurs first). Aston Martin

maintains a complete list of parts covered by Emissions

Warranties. For more details about the specific parts covered by

the Emissions Defect Warranty, contact Aston Martin or Aston

Martin Lagonda of North America Inc.1.1 Warranty

Communications.

8.4 What is Not Covered

Aston Martin may deny you coverage under the Emissions

Warranties if your vehicle or a part does not contain an

emissions-related defect or has failed due to abuse, neglect,

incorrect maintenance, unapproved modifications, or it concerns

any items included in section 4 (What is not covered under the

Warranties).

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 13 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

B.14 Aston Martin Warranty

9 California Emissions Warranties

9.1 Your Warranty Rights and Obligations

This Warranty is applicable if your vehicle is both:

a) Registered in California, or other States adopting California

emission and warranty regulations.

b) Certified for sale in California as indicated on the vehicle

emission control information label.

Aston Martin and the California Air Resources Board are pleased

to explain the emission control system Warranty on your Aston

Martin vehicle.

In California, new motor vehicles must be designed, built, and

equipped to meet the State's stringent anti-smog standards.

Aston Martin must warrant the emission control system on your

vehicle for the periods of time listed under the Manufacturer's

Warranty Coverage, provided there has been no abuse, neglect,

or incorrect maintenance of your vehicle.

Your emission control system may include parts such as the fuel

injection system, the ignition system, catalytic converter, and the

engine computer. Also included may be hoses, belts, connectors,

and other emissions-related assemblies.

Where a warrantable condition exists, Aston Martin will repair

your vehicle at no cost to you including diagnosis, parts, and

labor.

Other States adopting California emissions and warranty regulations:

Passenger car & light-duty trucks (up to 8,500 pounds GVWR) –

California, Connecticut, Maine, Massachusetts, New Jersey, Oregon,

Pennsylvania, Rhode Island, Vermont, Washington and any other States

that adopt the California emissions and warranty regulations from time

to time.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 14 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Aston Martin Warranty B.15

9.2 Manufacturer's Warranty Coverage

For vehicles eligible for coverage under the California Emissions

Warranty, if your vehicle is:

a) Three years in service or has mileage of 50,000 miles

(whichever first occurs):

• If your vehicle fails a Smog Check inspection, all necessary

repairs and adjustments will be made by Aston Martin to

make sure that your vehicle passes the inspection. This is your

Emission Control System Performance Warranty.

• If an emission related part (as defined in section 9.4) on your

vehicle is defective, the part will be repaired or replaced by

Aston Martin. This is your Short-Term Emission Control

System Defects Warranty.

b) Seven years in service or has mileage of 70,000 miles

(whichever first occurs):

• If an emission related part (as defined in section 9.5) on your

vehicle is defective, the part will be repaired or replaced by

Aston Martin. This is your Long-Term Emission Control

System Defects Warranty.

9.3 Owner's Warranty Responsibilities

As the vehicle owner or lessee, you are responsible for the

performance of the required maintenance listed in the Owner's

Guide. Aston Martin recommends that you retain all receipts

covering maintenance on your vehicle, but Aston Martin cannot

deny warranty coverage solely for the lack of receipts or for your

failure to check the performance of all scheduled maintenance.

You are responsible for presenting your vehicle to an Aston

Martin Dealer as soon as a problem exists. The warranty repairs

should be completed in a reasonable amount of time, not to

exceed 30 days.

Aston Martin may deny warranty coverage if your vehicle or a

part has failed due to abuse, neglect, improper maintenance, or

unapproved modifications.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 15 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

B.16 Aston Martin Warranty

If you have any questions regarding your warranty rights and / or

responsibilities, or if you want to report what you believe to be

violations of the terms of this Warranty, you may contact Aston

Martin Lagonda of North America Inc. After Sales Department:

Tel: (949) 379 3104

or the California Air Resources Board at:

State of California Air Resources Board,

9528 Telstar Avenue,

El Monte,

California 91731

9.4 What is Covered under the Short Term Emission

Control System Defects Warranty

The parts in the following list are covered by Emission Control

System Defects Warranties, which apply to every California

model vehicle manufactured from, and including, 2004.

• Air and Fuel Feedback Control System and Sensor

• Air Filter Housing

• Altitude Compensation System

• Camshaft Adjuster

• Camshaft Position Sensor

• Carbon Canister

• Catalytic Converter

• Charge Air Cooler

• Controls for Deceleration

• Electronic Ignition System

• Electronic Engine Control Sensors and Switches

• Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve, Spacer, Plate and

Associated Parts

• Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensors

• Exhaust Heat Control Valve

• Exhaust Manifold and Gasket

• Fuel Filler Neck

• Fuel Delivery Module

• Fuel Filter

• Fuel Injector

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 16 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Aston Martin Warranty B.17

• Fuel Level Sender

• Fuel Rail Assembly

•Fuel Tank

• Fuel Vapour Storage Canister, Liquid Separator and

Associated Controls

• Ignition Coil and / or Control Module

• Intake Manifold (Includes Boost Air Distribution Lines)

• Instrument Cluster (Malfunction Indicator Lamp)

• PCV System and Oil Filler Cap

• Engine Control Module

• Transmission Control Module

• Pulsed Secondary Air Injection Valve / Secondary Air Injection

Pump and Associated Parts

• Spark Control Components

• Spark Plugs

• Throttle Air Control By-pass Valve

• Throttle Body Assembly

• Turbocharger

• Volume Air Flow Sensor.

Some items and equipment in this list may not be installed to

this vehicle and therefore may not be applicable.

9.5 What is Covered under the Long Term Emission

Control System Defects Warranty

The parts in the following list are covered by Emission Control

System Defects Warranties, which apply to every California

model vehicle manufactured from, and including, 2004.

• Catalysts - Downpipe and Underfloor

• Camshaft Position Sensor

• Carbon Canister

• Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensors

• Exhaust Manifold and Gasket

• Fuel Delivery Module

• Fuel Level Sender

• Fuel Rail Assembly

•Fuel Tank

• Intake Manifold

• Engine Control Module

• Transmission Control Module

• Pulsed Secondary Air Injection Valve / Secondary Air Injection

Pump and Associated Parts

• Throttle Body Assembly

• Volume Air Flow Sensor.

Some items and equipment in this list may not be installed to

this vehicle and therefore may not be applicable.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 17 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

B.18 Aston Martin Warranty

10 How do I get Service under the Emissions

Warranties

To get service under your Emissions Warranties, take your vehicle

to any Aston Martin Dealer as soon as possible after it has failed

an EPA - approved test or a California Smog Check inspection.

You must show the Dealer the document that states your vehicle

has failed the test.

The Dealer will decide whether the repair is covered by the

Warranty. If the Dealer cannot make a decision with regard to

coverage under your Emissions Warranty, the Dealer shall

forward the query to Aston Martin.

Aston Martin shall procure to make a final decision within 30

days after you bring your vehicle in for repair. (The decision will

be made within a shorter time if the law requires you to have the

vehicle repaired more quickly in order to avoid additional

penalties.)

However, if you request a delay, agree to a delay, or if a delay is

caused by an event for which neither Aston Martin nor your

Aston Martin Dealer is responsible, the deadline for

determination does not have to be met by Aston Martin.

If a question about Emissions Warranty coverage is referred to

Aston Martin, you will be notified by Aston Martin in writing if

your claim for Emissions Warranty coverage is denied. The notice

will explain the basis for denying your claim.

11 How do I handle Emergency Repairs to

make sure they do not affect the Emissions

Warranties

Aston Martin strives to make sure that services are available to

conduct emergency repairs on your vehicle when necessary.

However, occasionally, Aston Martin may not be able to perform

emergency repairs for reasons outside of its control.

If your vehicle requires an emergency repair on Emission Related

Parts and an Aston Martin Dealer is ‘unavailable or unable to

perform the necessary repairs’ (defined below), you may, but

only as a last resort, procure repairs by someone other than an

authorized Aston Martin Dealer (a ‘Third Party’).

If the Dealer or, failing a decision by the Dealer, Aston Martin,

determines that such repair is covered under Warranty, Aston

Martin will reimburse you for the cost of such repairs, including

diagnosis.

Make sure that you obtain and take the following to your Aston

Martin Dealer within 30 days of the repairs having been

performed:

a) The parts that are replaced, and

b) A receipt for the work.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 18 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Aston Martin Warranty B.19

The term ‘unavailable or unable to perform the necessary repairs’

means:

• If you have informed Aston Martin of the required emergency

repairs and either Aston Martin or the Aston Martin

Emergency Service roadside assistance service provider is

unable to take your vehicle to an accessible authorized Aston

Martin Dealer.

• If an authorized Dealer is unable to perform the necessary

repairs.

• If an authorized Dealer does not have the warranted part

required to perform the necessary repairs.

Aston Martin shall only reimburse you if the repairs are

conducted by a Third Party within 30 days from the time you first

bring your vehicle to the Dealer for repairs and the time it is

repaired by the Third Party.

Any repair that is not completed within the 30 day period may (at

Aston Martin’s discretion) constitute an emergency and any

equivalent replacement part may be used in an emergency

situation. If Aston Martin determines that the repair is covered

under Warranty, Aston Martin will reimburse you for the repair

expenses if:

a) It does not exceed the Aston Martin's suggested retail price for

all warranted parts that are replaced and,

b) The labor charges do not exceed the Aston Martin's

recommended time allowance for the Warranty repair and the

labor charges are reasonable and similar to those charged by a

repairer of similar geographical location.

12 What Replacement Parts should I use

Aston Martin recommends that you use genuine Aston Martin

replacement parts. However, when you are having non-Warranty

work done on your vehicle, you may choose to use non-Aston

Martin parts of equivalent specification.

If you decide to use non-Aston Martin parts, make sure that they

are equivalent to Aston Martin parts in performance, quality and

durability. If you use replacement parts that are not equivalent to

Aston Martin parts, your vehicle's emissions control systems may

not work as effectively, and you may jeopardize your Emissions

Warranty coverage.

The maintenance, replacement, or repair of emissions control

devices or systems, the cost of which is not covered by the

Warranties, can be performed by any automotive repair

establishment or individual using non-Aston Martin parts.

For vehicles within the Warranty period, Aston Martin will repair

at no cost to the owner, under the Federal Emissions Warranty,

covered emission failures caused by correctly installed Aston

Martin parts or non-Aston Martin parts that have been ‘certified’

by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). Aston Martin

is not responsible for the cost of repairing any emission failures

caused by non-Aston Martin parts that have not been ‘certified’

by the EPA.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 19 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

B.20 Aston Martin Warranty

13 Preserve Your Emissions Warranty

If you do not maintain your vehicle correctly, Aston Martin may

have the right to deny you coverage under any of its Emissions

Warranties.

To have repairs made under the Emissions Warranties, you may

be required to show that you have followed Aston Martin's

instructions on correctly maintaining and using your vehicle, in

accordance with the instructions set out in the Owner’s Guide.

Make sure that you save your service receipts and keep accurate

records of any maintenance work performed.

If you are not satisfied with the handling of a Warranty matter,

you may contact Aston Martin Lagonda of North America Inc. If

you need more information about getting service under the

Federal Emissions Performance Warranty, or if you want to report

what you believe to be violations of the terms of this Warranty,

you may contact:

Director Vehicle Program and Compliance Division (6505J),

Environmental Protection Agency,

401 M Street, S.W,

Washington,

DC 20460

14 Customer Satisfaction

If you are not satisfied with any Warranty repairs performed by

an authorized Aston Martin Dealer and feel that you have a

legitimate Warranty concern that is not being addressed to your

satisfaction, follow the steps recommended below for the best

resolution.

Step 1: Raise your concerns with the authorized Dealer

Service Manager.

If you feel it would help clarify any concern, you should

accompany the Service Manager on test drive of vehicle to

demonstrate your issues and concerns. Often simply voicing your

concerns directly to a manager or with the trained technician

results in a satisfactory repair.

Step 2: If you are still not satisfied, contact dealership owner

or General Manager.

Often raising an unresolved issue to a General Manger will

benefit all involved and bring a focussed effort from all parties

involved.

Step 3: If you are still not satisfied, bring concerns to Aston

Martin Lagonda of North America Inc. Regional After Sales

Manager or Operations Manager.

All authorized Aston Martin Dealers have the contact details of

the relevant After Sales and Operations Managers. Ask for the

Aston Martin contact information and it will be gladly supplied.

Step 4: If you are still not satisfied, either:

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 20 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Aston Martin Warranty B.21

a) Seek arbitration

All disputes relating to the Warranty or the Extended Service

Contract shall be resolved by binding arbitration under the Rules

of Commercial Arbitration of the American Arbitration

Association including its Supplementary Procedures for

Consumer Related Disputes, before a single arbitrator who shall

be bound by the terms of this Document. To maintain the highest

quality of service and for staff training purposes, telephone calls

to Aston Martin may be monitored and / or recorded.

b) If your dispute is in the State of California, contact the

Better Business Bureau (BBB)

The BBB program is only in effect in the State of California,

but steps one through three should be followed for quickest

result.

As a final step to make sure that your concerns are being fairly

considered, Aston Martin has agreed to participate in a dispute

settlement program administered by the BBB, at no cost to the

customer.

Refer to section 15 for further details of the BBB.

15 The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto

Line Program

(California only)

The Better Business Bureau (BBB) works with manufacturers and

their customers in an attempt to reach a mutually acceptable

resolution of any Warranty related concerns. If a Warranty

concern has not been resolved using the three-step procedure

outlined in Customer Satisfaction (Refer to ’14 Customer

Satisfaction’, page B.20), you may be eligible to participate in the

BBB Auto Line Program.

The BBB Auto Line Program consists of two parts – mediation and

arbitration. During mediation, a representative of the BBB will

contact both you and Aston Martin to explore options for

settlement of the claim. If an agreement is not reached during

mediation and your claim is eligible, you may participate in the

arbitration process and the BBB will schedule an arbitration

hearing so that you can present your case in an informal setting

before an impartial person. The arbitrator will consider the

testimony provided and make a decision after the hearing.

You are not bound by the decision, but should you choose to

accept the BBB Auto Line decision, Aston Martin shall abide by

the accepted decision as well and will comply with the decision

within a reasonable time not to exceed 30 days after the

manufacturer receives notice of the consumer’s acceptance of

the decision.

You may reject the BBB Auto Line decision and go to court but

the decision and any findings will be admissible in any court

action

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 21 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

B.22 Aston Martin Warranty

Disputes submitted to the BBB Auto Line Program are usually

decided within 40 days after you file your claim with BBB. If you

wish to use the program and you qualify for participation, you

will be required to provide the following information:

• Your name and address

• The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

• The make, model and year of your vehicle

• A description of the problem with your vehicle.

BBB AUTO LINE will also ask you for other information that may

help resolve your concerns, such as the purchase price of your

vehicle, the vehicle's current mileage, and copies of repair orders.

Upon receipt of such information, BBB will review the claim for

eligibility under the Program Summary Guidelines.

You are required to resort to BBB AUTO LINE before exercising

rights or seeking remedies under the Federal Magnuson-Moss

Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C. § 2301 et seq. To the extent permitted

by the applicable State ‘Lemon Law’, you are also required to

resort to BBB AUTO LINE before exercising any rights or seeking

remedies under the ‘Lemon Law’. If you choose to seek remedies

that are not created by the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act or the

applicable State ‘Lemon Law’, you are not required to first use

BBB AUTO LINE.

For more information about BBB AUTO LINE, including current

eligibility standards, call 1-800-955-5100, visit the BBB website

at www.lemonlaw.bbb.org, or write to the BBB at:

BBB AUTO LINE,

3033 Wilson Boulevard,

Suite 600 Arlington,

VA 22201

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 22 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Aston Martin Warranty B.23

16 State Warranty Enforcement Laws

These State laws (sometimes called ‘lemon laws’) allow owners

to receive a replacement vehicle or a refund of the purchase

price, under certain circumstances. The laws vary from State to

State.

To the extent your State Law allows, Aston Martin requires that

you first send us a written notification of any defects or non-

conformities that you have experienced with your vehicle. This

will give us the opportunity to make any necessary repairs before

you pursue the remedies provided by your State’s law.

In other States, where not specifically required by State Law,

Aston Martin requests that you send us written notification to:

National After Sales Manager,

Aston Martin Lagonda of North America Inc.,

9920 Irvine Center Drive,

Irvine CA 92618

17 Aston Martin Extended Service Contract

You may purchase an Aston Martin Extended Service Contract

(ESC) which shall protect your vehicle for an extended period

after the expiry of your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

The ESC provides:

a) Protection against covered repair costs. (Wear items, neglect,

force majeure and damage caused by outside influence are

excluded, and shall be left to the sole discretion of Aston Martin.).

b) Aston Martin Emergency Assistance roadside support.

c) Zero deductible, which means that you will not pay for

covered repairs in the case of a legitimate claim.

d) 12 or 24 months coverage across the USA and Canada.

Aston Martin offers various ESC products of varying levels of

cover dependent upon the age and mileage of the vehicle. All

vehicles must pass an Aston Martin multi-point inspection prior

to the registration of an ESC on a vehicle.

Please note that the ESC Terms and Conditions shall apply. For a

full list of the ESC Terms and Conditions, or if you would like to

arrange such cover, talk to your nearest participating Aston

Martin Dealer.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 23 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

B.24 Aston Martin Warranty

Owner And Vehicle Details

Name:

Address:

Post Code:

Registration Plate No.:

VIN No.:

Engine No.:

Warranty Start Date:

If the vehicle is sold, the benefits of any un-expired portion of the

warranties can be transferred to the new owner.

The new owner should complete a ‘tear off’ sheet (next page) and

send the new details to:

Aston Martin Warranty Department

Aston Martin Lagonda Limited

Banbury Road

Gaydon

Warwick

CV35 0DB

England

Signature:

Date:

Dealer Stamp

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 24 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Aston Martin Warranty B.25

Owner Warranty Transfer (2)

VIN No.:

Odometer:

Date of Purchase:

Name:

Address:

Post Code:

Telephone No.:

Email Address:

Signature:

Date:

Owner Warranty Transfer (1)

VIN No.:

Odometer:

Date of Purchase:

Name:

Address:

Post Code:

Telephone No.:

Email Address:

Signature:

Date:

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 25 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

B.26 Aston Martin Warranty

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 26 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Aston Martin Warranty B.27

Owner Warranty Transfer (4)

VIN No.:

Odometer:

Date of Purchase:

Name:

Address:

Post Code:

Telephone No.:

Email Address:

Signature:

Date:

Owner Warranty Transfer (3)

VIN No.:

Odometer:

Date of Purchase:

Name:

Address:

Post Code:

Telephone No.:

Email Address:

Signature:

Date:

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 27 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

B.28 Aston Martin Warranty

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 28 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Aston Martin Warranty B.29

Owner Warranty Transfer (6)

VIN No.:

Odometer:

Date of Purchase:

Name:

Address:

Post Code:

Telephone No.:

Email Address:

Signature:

Date:

Owner Warranty Transfer (5)

VIN No.:

Odometer:

Date of Purchase:

Name:

Address:

Post Code:

Telephone No.:

Email Address:

Signature:

Date:

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 29 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

B.30 Aston Martin Warranty

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 30 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Aston Martin Assistance

Aston Martin Roadside Assistance................................. C.2

How Does the Plan Work............................................. C.3

Further Information......................................................C.3

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 1 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

C.2 Aston Martin Assistance

Aston Martin Roadside Assistance

In the event of a breakdown caused by a defect covered under

the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, the Aston Martin Roadside

Assistance scheme will provide the Aston Martin owner with

emergency roadside assistance at no cost. The scheme also

provides the following benefits:

• Exclusive 24-Hour Toll-Free Assistance Line

• 24-Hour Emergency Towing

• 24-Hour Roadside Assistance

• 24-Hour Emergency Lockout Service (up to US $100 per call

out)

• Sign and Drive Service

• 24-Hour Emergency Trip Interruption Benefits

• 24-Hour Aston Martin Dealer Locator Service

• Repaired Vehicle Reunite Service

• Assistance Experience Survey Card.

The Aston Martin Roadside Assistance scheme benefits provide

for towing to the nearest approved dealer. Should the vehicle

breakdown occur 150 or more miles (241 or more km) from the

nearest approved dealer and 150 or more miles (241 or more

km) from the primary residence of the owner or operator, the

owner or operator is entitled to trip interruption benefits. Trip

interruption benefits include lodging and meals for up to 2 nights,

and alternative transportation. Trip interruption benefits are

limited to a maximum of US $500 per interruption.

The term of the Aston Martin Roadside Assistance scheme runs

concurrent with the Aston Martin New Vehicle Limited

Warranty. The plan does not cover the following:

• Rental fleet vehicles

• Breakdowns caused by accident, vandalism, racing or abuse

• Additional towing costs for towing to other than the nearest

approved dealer to the breakdown site.

Expenses for such items as entertainment, recreation, and non-

essential goods and services are excluded from trip interruption

benefits.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 2 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Aston Martin Assistance C.3

How Does the Plan Work

The national toll-free assistance telephone number is shown on

your Roadside Assistance Membership Card and on the label on

the drivers side door pillar.

If your Aston Martin vehicle suffers a breakdown whilst driving,

call the toll-free number: 1- 888 - 59ASTON (1-888-592-7866).

It is available 24 hours a day.

It may be helpful to have the relevant telephone numbers

entered into your mobile phone ‘phone book’.

Have your Aston Martin Roadside Assistance Membership Card

ready.

Provide the Roadside Assistance Service Representative with:

•Your name

• The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), which is printed on

your Roadside Assistance Membership Card. The VIN is also

printed on a decal on the drivers side dashboard. This decal

may be viewed from outside the car by looking in through the

front windshield.

• The vehicle location.

• Where you are calling from, including a telephone number on

which you may be contacted.

The Roadside Assistance Service Representative will work with

you to find the best solution to your concern. Please stay with the

vehicle until assistance arrives.

Further Information

See the separate brochure provided for full details of the Aston

Martin Roadside Assistance scheme. The terms of the scheme

may be changed without notice.

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 3 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

C.4 Aston Martin Assistance

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 4 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Alphabetical Index

Accessory Sockets ...............................................................3.34

Adaptive Damping .............................................................5.15

Anti-Theft Systems ..............................................................2.11

Alarm ...............................................................................2.12

Engine Immobiliser ........................................................2.12

Motion Sensor ................................................................2.12

Tow Away Protection ....................................................2.12

Aston Martin Facilities ..........................................................A.2

Audio

Specification

.....................................................................8.2

Automatic Transmission

Fault Conditions

.............................................................12.6

Battery ................................................................................12.44

Blind Spot monitoring ........................................................5.12

Bonnet Release .................................................................12.10

Brakes ...................................................................................5.17

ABS ...................................................................................5.18

Brake Warnings ..............................................................5.17

Footbrake ........................................................................5.17

Park Brake .......................................................................5.20

Catalytic Converters ...........................................................12.5

Centre Stack Controls ..........................................................4.5

Child Safety .........................................................................3.18

Child seat installation ....................................................3.24

Front Child Seat Installation ......................................... 3.24

Occupant Classification System ................................... 3.20

Rear Child Seat Installation .......................................... 3.26

Climate

Climate Menu

.................................................................. 6.5

Climate Control

Automatic Climate Control

............................................ 6.4

Manual Climate Control ................................................. 6.4

Climate Controls .................................................................. 6.2

Infotainment ..................................................................... 6.3

Switches ............................................................................ 6.2

Cruise Control ...................................................................... 5.8

Cylinder Deactivation ........................................................ 5.26

Defrosting and Demisting

Automatic

......................................................................... 6.7

Drive Modes ....................................................................... 5.10

Driving Techniques .............................................................. 5.2

Easy Entry/Exit ....................................................................... 2.7

Electric windows .................................................................. 3.5

Emergency Engine Start ..................................................... 2.10

Emergency Key ..................................................................... 2.9

Emission Warranty ............................................................. 12.3

Engine Start ........................................................................... 5.4

ESP (Electronic Stability Program) .................................... 5.21

Event Data Recorder ........................................................... 1.4

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 1 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

D.2 Alphabetical Index

Fluid Capacities ................................................................ 12.15

Fluid Specifications .......................................................... 12.14

Fluids and Capacities ....................................................... 12.11

Fuel .................................................................................... 12.61

Catalytic Converters ...................................................... 12.5

Fuses .................................................................................. 12.33

Garage Door Opener ........................................................ 2.13

Operation ....................................................................... 2.16

Programming .................................................................. 2.14

Reprogramming ............................................................. 2.17

Rolling Code Synchronisation ...................................... 2.16

Instrument Cluster

Media

.............................................................................. 4.15

Menu ............................................................................... 4.13

Navi ................................................................................. 4.15

Radio ............................................................................... 4.15

Service ............................................................................. 4.15

Settings ............................................................................ 4.16

Telephone ...................................................................... 4.15

Trip .................................................................................. 4.14

Instrument Display ............................................................... 4.2

Jump Start From Another Vehicle .................................. 12.59

Key Battery Replacement ................................................... 2.3

Lamps .................................................................................12.45

Lighting ................................................................................4.18

Exterior ............................................................................4.18

Interior .............................................................................4.20

Locking and Opening

Outside

..............................................................................2.6

Maintenance

Vehicle Lifting

.................................................................12.7

Media

Media select

......................................................................8.9

Radio Functions ................................................................8.5

Sound ..............................................................................8.17

Memory Functions ...............................................................3.9

Mirrors ....................................................................................3.6

Exterior ..............................................................................3.7

Interior ...............................................................................3.6

Multimedia

Bluetooth

.........................................................................8.16

Media Menu ...................................................................8.12

Media Register ................................................................8.16

Multimedia Controls ............................................................8.4

Navigation

Controls

.............................................................................9.2

Destination ........................................................................9.9

Options ..............................................................................9.3

Position Menu ..................................................................9.8

Route .................................................................................9.7

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 2 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

Alphabetical Index D.3

Traffic

.................................................................................9.6

Navigation Menu ................................................................9.13

Occupant Restraint System ...............................................3.10

ORC

Airbags

.............................................................................3.16

Seat Belts .........................................................................3.12

Owner Maintenance Checks ............................................12.8

Park Assist Systems .............................................................5.28

360° Camera System .....................................................5.33

Active Park Assist ............................................................5.30

Performance ......................................................................12.53

Quick Start

Driving Position

................................................................1.3

Infotainment ...................................................................1.11

Vehicle Controls ...............................................................1.6

Vehicle Key .......................................................................1.2

Replacement of Airbag Units Record ..............................A.33

Replacement of Seat Belt Pre-tensioners Record ...........A.33

Safety Defects - Reporting ...................................................1.5

Satellite Radio .......................................................................8.6

Seat Adjustment ....................................................................3.2

Seat release .......................................................................3.4

Service Record ....................................................................A.12

Servicing ................................................................................ A.8

Servicing Precautions ......................................................... 12.3

Settings

System

............................................................................. 10.3

Time ................................................................................ 10.2

Vehicle ............................................................................ 10.2

Specifications

4.0L V8 Engine

............................................................. 12.51

5.2L V12 Engine .......................................................... 12.50

Body .............................................................................. 12.17

Brakes ............................................................................ 12.18

Steering ......................................................................... 12.17

Suspension .................................................................... 12.17

Transmission ................................................................. 12.52

Steering Column .................................................................. 3.8

Steering Controls ................................................................ 4.12

Stop/Start ............................................................................. 5.27

Storage ................................................................................. 3.30

Tool Kit ................................................................................ 12.8

Touch Pad ............................................................................. 4.7

Track Days ............................................................................ 5.2

Transmission Controls ......................................................... 5.5

Automatic ......................................................................... 5.5

PRND ................................................................................ 5.6

Touchtronic .............................................................. 5.5, 5.7

Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ....................... 5.24

Tyres ................................................................................... 12.20

Summer Tyres .............................................................. 12.22

Tyre Inflation Kit .......................................................... 12.24

Tyre Pressures .............................................................. 12.20

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 3 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM

D.4 Alphabetical Index

Winter Tyres ................................................................. 12.23

Unlocking and Opening ..................................................... 2.5

Deck Lid ........................................................................... 2.7

Inside ................................................................................. 2.6

Outside ............................................................................. 2.5

Vehicle Identification .......................................................... 1.4

Vehicle Key ........................................................................... 2.2

Vehicle Provenance ............................................................. A.3

Vehicle Recovery ............................................................. 12.58

Voice Control ..................................................................... 4.16

Washers and Wipers ....................................................... 12.16

Wheels ............................................................................... 12.19

Wiper Controls ................................................................... 4.17

KY53-19A321-HA.book Page 4 Tuesday, January 9, 2018 2:24 PM